| all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
User Manual Section 1 | Users Manual | 3.02 MiB | ||||
| 1 |
|
User Manual Section 2 | Users Manual | 3.00 MiB | ||||
| 1 | External Photos | |||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | native | ||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | September 01 2004 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | |||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos |
| 1 | User Manual Section 1 | Users Manual | 3.02 MiB |
Ripwave Base Station Installation & Commissioning Guide Part Number 40-00047-00 Revision D, Version 1.0 February 28, 2003 All information disclosed by this document is the proprietary property of Navini Networks, Inc. and is protected by copyright, trademark, and/or trade secret laws. All rights therein are expressly reserved. Proprietary Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. About This Document Purpose This document provides a Navini-certified Installation & Commissioning Technician with instructions to properly install the Base Transceiver Station, Radio Frequency Subsystem, and cabling; and to test and commission the Base Station after installation. Revision History Editors N/A Comments Draft Date 2001 Revision/Version Authors J. Price A/1.0 C. Keltner A. Chua P. Blain J. Coulson D. Karina K. Sharp L. Hoffman Same Same Same Same Same Same B/v1.0 4.02 C/1.0 8.30.02 C/1.0 9.3.02 9.27.02 C/1.0 10.18.02 C/1.0 2.7.03 D/1.0 2.28.03 D/1.0 Same Preliminary Prepare for release 1.16 N/A N/A S. Redfoot Review comments from class 8.30.02 Preliminary Commercial Release 1.18 Same Feedback on forms and specifications Same Combined all Base Station I&C into one Same manual; Preliminary 1.19 Standard Release 1.19 Same Contacts Contact Navini Networks Technical Support during normal business hours: Monday through Friday 8:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. Central Time. You can also submit questions or comments by web or email at any time. Corporate Headquarters:
Technical Support:
Web Address:
E-mail:
Navini Networks, Inc. 2240 Campbell Creek Blvd. Suite 110 Richardson, Texas 75082 USA
(972) 852-4200 1-866-RIPWAVE www.navini.com / select Technical Support techsupport@navini.com 2 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Permissions, Trademarks & Distribution Copyright February 2003, Navini Networks, Inc. All information contained herein and disclosed by this document is the proprietary property of Navini Networks, Inc. and all rights therein are expressly reserved. Acceptance of this material signifies agreement by the recipient that the information contained in this document is confidential and that it will be used solely for the purposes set forth herein. Acceptance of this material signifies agreement by the recipient that it will not be used, reproduced in whole or in part, disclosed, distributed, or conveyed to others in any manner or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems without the express written permission of Navini Networks, Inc. Navini Networks, Internet at the Speed of Thought, zero-install, unwired by Navini, the Navini Networks logo, and Ripwave are trademarks of Navini Networks, Inc. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks and/or service marks of their respective owners. Nothing herein constitutes any representation, warranty, assurance, or guaranty of any kind. Because of continuing developments and improvements in design, manufacturing, and deployment, material in this document is subject to change without notification and does not represent any commitment or obligation on the part of Navini Networks, Inc. Navini Networks, Inc. shall have no liability for any error or damages resulting from the use of this document. Any unauthorized usage is strictly prohibited without the express written permission of Navini Networks, Inc. 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. Navini Networks, Inc. 2240 Campbell Creek Boulevard Suite 110 Richardson, Texas 75082 USA Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 3 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT..............................................................................................................2 PERMISSIONS, TRADEMARKS & DISTRIBUTION............................................................................3 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................6 REGULATORY INFORMATION........................................................................................................8 BATTERY CAUTION & PROCEDURES ............................................................................................9 GLOSSARY OF TERMS & ABBREVIATIONS..................................................................................10 CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................17 RIPWAVE DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................................17 PROCEDURAL DOCUMENTS & FORMS ........................................................................................18 I&C PROCESS FLOWCHART........................................................................................................19 BASE STATION COMPONENTS.....................................................................................................29 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .........................................................................................................33 BASE STATION SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................34 MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................................36 CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................39 PRE-INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................39 INSTALL POWER & GROUNDING ................................................................................................42 INSTALL CABLES........................................................................................................................45 INSTALL THE BTS ......................................................................................................................50 INSTALL GPS ANTENNAS...........................................................................................................55 INSTALL THE RFS.......................................................................................................................58 VERIFY INSTALLED CIRCUIT CARDS ..........................................................................................69 BASE STATION INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION..........................................................................70 CHAPTER 3: COMMISSIONING ..........................................................................................71 REVIEW CUSTOMER NETWORK PLANS.......................................................................................71 INSTALL EMS SERVER...............................................................................................................71 VERIFY CABLE CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................72 CONFIGURE & POWER UP THE BTS ...........................................................................................73 CALIBRATE THE BASE STATION .................................................................................................96 VERIFY THE CALIBRATION .......................................................................................................100 EXPORT BTS DATA..................................................................................................................110 PERFORM LOCAL CPE TESTS...................................................................................................111 INSTALL & TEST CUSTOMER EMS OPERATIONS .....................................................................116 PERFORM CALIBRATION USING CUSTOMERS EMS.................................................................116 VERIFY SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................................117 VERIFY SYSTEM OPERATION WITH MULTIPLE CPES .............................................................118 BACK UP EMS DATABASE.......................................................................................................118 CUSTOMER ACCEPTANCE.........................................................................................................118 4 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide APPENDIX A: ORDERING DOCUMENTATION & FORMS .........................................119 APPENDIX B: SITE CANDIDATE EVALUATION FORM..............................................121 APPENDIX C: RFS SYSTEM TEST (CABLE SWEEPS) ..................................................133 APPENDIX D: BASE STATION INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION ..........................151 APPENDIX E: CONFIGURATION FORMS.......................................................................154 APPENDIX F: BASE STATION CALIBRATION VERIFICATION* .............................175 APPENDIX G: DRIVE STUDY .............................................................................................183 APPENDIX H: LOCATION (FTP) TESTS ..........................................................................188 APPENDIX I: CUSTOMER ACCEPTANCE ......................................................................195 APPENDIX J: OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES .........................................................................197 APPENDIX K: INSTALL CONNECTORS ON CABLES..................................................213 APPENDIX L: CHASSIS ALARMS......................................................................................215 APPENDIX M: ANTENNA DRAWINGS.............................................................................217 APPENDIX N: RECTIFIER/BBU SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................219 APPENDIX O: SAMPLE BILL OF MATERIALS (BOM).................................................227 APPENDIX P: SAMPLE BASE STATION DRAWING .....................................................231 APPENDIX Q: SAMPLE STATEMENT OF WORK .........................................................233 APPENDIX R: SAMPLE RESPONSIBILITY ASSIGNMENT MATRIX (RAM)...........237 LIST OF EXHIBITS.................................................................................................................245 LIST OF FIGURES ..................................................................................................................247 LIST OF TABLES ....................................................................................................................249
Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 5 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Safety To optimize safety and expedite installation and service, read this document thoroughly. Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions marked on the equipment and included in this document. To aid in the prevention of injury and damage to property, cautionary symbols have been placed in this document to alert the reader to known potentially hazardous situations, or hazards to equipment or procedures. The symbols are placed before the information to which they apply. However, any situation that involves heavy equipment and electricity can become hazardous, and caution and safety should be practiced at all times when installing, servicing, or operating the equipment. Caution Symbol - possible equipment or property damage Warning Symbol - could cause personal injury or otherwise be hazardous to your health Navini Networks, Inc., expressly requires that when using Navini electronic equipment always follow the basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of electrical shock, fire, and injury to people and/or property. 1. Follow all warnings and instructions that come with the equipment. 2. Do not use the equipment while you are in a bathtub, shower, pool, or spa. Exposure of the equipment to water could cause severe electrical shock or serious damage to the equipment. 3. Do not allow any type of liquid to come in contact with the equipment. Unplug the equipment from the power source before cleaning. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use any soaps or liquid cleaners. 4. Follow all airport and FAA regulations when using the equipment on or near aircraft. 5. Only operate the equipment from the type of power source(s) indicated in this manual (110 VAC or Navini supplied battery). Any other type of input power source may cause damage to the equipment. 6. Power the equipment using only the battery or the AC adapter cable provided, and in accordance with the instructions specified in the User Guide. 7. Do not use a frayed or damaged power cord. Do not place the power cord where it can be 8. Do not touch wires where the insulation is frayed or worn unless the equipment has been 9. Do not overload wall outlets, power strips, or extension cords. This can cause serious 10. Do not place the equipment on an unstable surface. It can fall and cause injury or damage to stepped on or tripped over. disconnected from its power source. electrical shock or fire. the equipment. 6 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide 11. Do not disassemble the equipment. Removing covers exposes dangerous voltages or other risks and also voids the warranty. Incorrect reassembly can cause equipment damage or electrical shock. Only an authorized repair technician should service this product. 12. Do not expose the equipment to extreme hot or cold temperatures. 13. Do not use the equipment under the following conditions:
When the equipment has been exposed to water or moisture. When the equipment has been damaged. When the power cord is damaged or frayed. When the equipment does not operate properly or shows a distinct change in performance. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 7 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Regulatory Information FCC Notice WARNING! This device is a Radio Frequency transmitter. It is required to comply with FCC RF exposure requirements for transmitting devices. A minimum separation distance of 8 inches (20 cm) or more must be maintained between the antenna and all persons during device operations to ensure compliance with the FCCs rules for Radio Frequency Exposure. If this minimum distance cannot be maintained, exposure to RF levels that exceed the FCCs limits may result. FCC Compliance and Advisory Statement Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, Pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. The operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed or used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
(1) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna;
(2) Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver;
(3) Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected;
(4) Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for additional suggestions. INFORMATION TO USER This device has been authorized as a radio frequency transmitter under the appropriate rules of the Federal Communications Commission. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Navini Networks could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 8 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Battery Caution & Procedures WARNING! To reduce risk of injury or fire, follow these instructions when handling the battery. 1. Risk of explosion is possible if the battery is replaced with one not supplied by Navini Networks. battery disposal guidelines. 2. Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. It may explode. Check with the local codes for 3. Do not open or mutilate the battery. The battery contains substances that are toxic, corrosive, or harmful to humans. If battery substances come in contact with the skin, seek medical help immediately. 4. Do not attempt to recharge the battery by any means except per the instructions in this manual. 5. Remove the battery from the equipment if the equipment is not going to be used for a long period of time. The battery could leak and cause damage to the equipment. 6. Exercise care when handling the battery to prevent shorting the battery with conducting materials such as bracelets, rings, and keys. 7. Store the battery pack in a dry place, 0 to +40 degrees Celsius. 8. Dispose of used batteries according to environmental guidelines. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 9 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations Term 802.11 Stands For.... 802.11 Standard ACC ACK AP ARP Access Channel or Access Code Channel Acknowledge Access Point Address Resolution Protocol ASYNCH Asynchronous ATM BB BCC BS Asynchronous Transfer Mode Broadband Broadcast Code (or Control) Channel Base Station BTS Base Transceiver Station BW Bandwidth BYTE CAM CC 1Communications Controller or 2Cross-check Meaning An IEEE LAN standard for wireless Ethernet replacement technology in the ISM band. Runs at up to 10 Mbps. AKA, Paging Channel. The signal path that tells a mobile to prepare for an incoming call. Positive message sent by a protocol to acknowledge reception of a transmitted packet Wireless LAN transceiver that acts as a center point of an all-
wireless network or as a connection point between wireless and wired networks. The function of the ARP is to match higher-level network IP addresses with the physical hardware address of a piece of equipment. Not occurring at regular intervals, as in data piped over a network Transporting a broad range of user data at irregular intervals over network facilities RF system with constant data rate of 1.5 Mbps or higher. A channel of data transmitted by one entity and received by many devices. Network Access equipment and software that transmits and receives, as well as processes, voice or data calls from mobile units to network connections. A Ripwave Base Station consists of the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and the Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS), or antenna, plus a Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna for timing. The Ripwave BTS is a two-shelf rack that holds the RF modules and digital circuit cards that interpret radio signals into computer language and sends messages to and from the local or wide area network. It functions between the RFS and the EMS to handle the signaling. Frequency spectrum usable for data transfers. It describes the maximum data rate that a signal can attain on the medium without encountering significant loss of power. Usually expressed in bits per second (digital) or Hertz (analog). 8 bits Interface for purposes of configuring elements in the system and handling other OAM requirements. 1A type of circuit card that resides in the Digital shelf of the Ripwave BTS. It handles all interfaces between BTS and network. 2An EMS functionality that allows the system to perform an automated sanity check of the datafill. Byte Configuration & Alarm Manager An EMS functionality that is handled through a Graphical User 10 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Term CD Stands For.... 1Compact Disk or 2Change Directory1An optical disk capable of storing large amounts of data (700x Meaning CDMA Code Division Multiple Access CD-ROM Compact Disk - Read Only Memory See CD. If a CD is not Read Only, computers can write data CHP Channel Processor Card Competitive Local Exchange Carrier A telephone company that competes with an incumbent Local floppy disk). It can be inserted into most pcs and read to load files onto a computer 2A software programming term in C language that tells the computer to go to a different location in the computers memory. Digital cellular technology that uses a spread-spectrum technique where individual conversations are encoded with a random digital sequence. Increases capacity and speed of communications messages between mobile units over other types of wireless networks. to it with that capability. A card in the digital shelf of the BTS that performs the first stage of signal processing for up to 4 antennae. One Navini 2.4 GHz BTS has 8 antennae. The card performs digital-to-analog conversion (DAC) and analog-to-digital conversion (ADC) for up to 10 carriers. Exchange Carrier (LEC). A text-based programming language through which a user communicates with an operating system or an application. A standard for Network Management Systems that allows integration with NMS regardless of programming language or Operating System. Communications equipment that resides at the customers location. Unit of measurement for sound. A ratio, measured in decibels, of the effective gain of an antenna compared to a dipole antenna (2 horizontal rods in line with each other). The greater the dBd value the higher the gain and therefore the more acute the angle of coverage. A ratio, measured in decibels, of the effective gain of an antenna compared to an isotropic antenna (measured along axes in all directions). The greater the dBi value the higher the gain and therefore the more acute the angle of coverage. A protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses to devices on a network. Different Quality of Service (QoS) descriptions for different types of traffic, i.e., voice, video, email. The DiffServ table is where each level of QoS is defined. Equivalent to Class of Service (COS) in POTS. A special kind of file used to organize other files into a hierarchical structure. In this case, data messages transmitted from the BTS to the CPE. TCP/IP networking term that is a protocol for matching objects to network (IP) addresses. Also T1 or E1. Digital transmission equipment that can handle up to 1.544 Mbps. A type of service whereby users gain access to the Internet through high-speed data networks. CLEC CLI CORBA CPE dB dBd Command Line Interface Common Object Request Broker Agent Customer Premise Equipment Decibel Decibel/Dipole dBi Decibel/Isotropic DHCP DiffServ Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Differentiated Service DIR DL DNS DS-1 DSL Directory DownLink Domain Name Server Digital Signal - 1 Digital Subscriber Line Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 11 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Term DSP EID EMS ERP FCC FE FTP Gain Gb GB GHz GPS GUI HW Hz I&C IEC IF IMA IP ISP Kb KB KHz Stands For.... Digital Signal Processor Equipment Identifier Element Management System Effective Radiated Power Federal Communications Commission Far End File Transfer Protocol Gain Gigabit Gigabyte Gigahertz Global Positioning System Graphical User Interface Hardware Hertz Installation & Commissioning Inter-exchange Carrier Interface Card Inverse Multiplexing over ATM Internet Protocol Internet Service Provider Kilobit Kilobyte Kilohertz Meaning Compressing or manipulating analog signals to digital signals and vice-versa. Field in EMS for assigning IP address or name to individual pieces of equipment for purposes of configuring the system. An application that allows the user to define and manipulate managed objects as a system within an overall network. The actual power in Watts radiated from a transmitters antenna. United States government regulatory agency that supervises, licenses and otherwise controls electronic and electromagnetic transmission standards. A relative term that refers to the receiving element in a network, as opposed to the near-end element that is transmitting data. A TCP/IP method consisting of a client and server and used to transfer files between two or more sites or elements in a network. Ratio of the output amplitude of a signal to the input amplitude of a signal, expressed in decibels (dB). One billion (1,000,000,000) bits. One billion (1,000,000,000) bytes. One billion (1,000,000,000) hertz - cycles per second. Ultra high frequency (UHF) signals, including microwave signals. A constellation of 24 well-spaced satellites that orbit the earth and enable users with GPS antennas to pinpoint their exact geographical position. A graphic rather than purely text based user interface to a computer or computing system. Physical, tangible equipment 1 cycle per second. Term used to describe the procedures of physically installing technical equipment then powering up the equipment to make sure it will operate (to put it into commission). Also IXC. Public switching network service provider (carrier) that connects across and between local exchange carriers
(LEC). Card on the digital shelf of the Ripwave BTS that takes the analog signal from the Channel Processor card (CHP) and converts it to a baseband signal before sending it on to the RF modules for transmission (forward link), and vice-versa
(reverse link). A method of building dynamic routes of 2 or more T1s to increase bandwidth so that PVCs can share the IMA resources, as needed, for data transmissions. A TCP/IP protocol used to route data from its source to its destination. A company that provides access to the Internet. 1,024 bits 1,024 bytes 1,000 hertz. 12 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Term L1 L2 L3 Stands For.... Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 LAN Local Area Network LCP LED LLC Link Control Protocol Light-emitting Diode Logical Link Controller LOS Line-of-sight MAC Media Access Control Mb MB Mbps MDM MHz MIB MMDS NE NLOS Megabit Megabyte Megabits Per Second Modem Card Megahertz Multipoint Multi-channel Distribution Service 1Near-end or 2Network Element Non Line-of-site Meaning Physical Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L1 describes the physical layer, or electrical and mechanical port-to-port connections, in the network. Data Link Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L2 describes the data link layer where data is set up and torn down in a specific format (frames), through the overall network. Also responsible for detecting and correcting errors by requesting retransmission. Network Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L3 describes the network addressing that gets data to its destination within the network, i.e., IP addressing. A data network of interconnected computers, servers, printers, and other peripherals that communicate at high speeds over short distances, usually within the same building. Also allows for sharing of resources. Basis of the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) scheme for negotiating and establishing connections. An electronic device that lights up when electricity passes through it. Often used to indicate equipment or system state. A protocol that governs the transition of frames between data stations regardless of how the medium is shared. Its the upper sub-layer that further defines the Media Access Control (MAC) protocol. It provides the basis for an unacknowledged connectionless service on a LAN - i.e., error correction, multiplexing, broadcasting. Describes laser, microwave, RF, and infrared transmission systems that require no obstruction in a direct path between the transmitter and the receiver. Protocol that governs access to a network in order to transmit data between nodes. In a wireless LAN, the MAC is the radio controller protocol (L2). One million (1,000,000) bits. One million bytes. Literally - 1,048,576 bytes. Transmission speed at rate of one million bytes per second. A card in the Navini BTS that converts digital signals into analog so the signals can be transmitted over telephone lines, and vice-
versa. Modem stands for modulator/demodulator. One million (1,000,000) hertz - cycles per second. Normally used to refer to how fast a microprocessor can execute instructions. MIBs carry information in a standard format so external tools can analyze network management and performance. Fixed wireless, high-speed local service that operates at 2.1 - 2.7 GHz. Speed 10 Mbps. Originally conceived for cable TV service. 1The transmitting end, versus the receiving end, of a signal transmission. 2 A router, switch, or hub in an ISDN network. Describes laser, microwave, RF, and infrared transmission systems that can penetrate obstructions in the path between the transmitter and the receiver. Management Information Base A collection of managed objects used in SNMP-based networks. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 13 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Term NMS Stands For.... Network Management System NOC Network Operations Center OAM OS OSI PC PCB PDU Ping Operation, Administration, Maintenance Operating System Open Systems Interconnection Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board Packet Data Unit or Protocol Data Unit Ping PPPoE Propagation Point-to-point Protocol Over Ethernet Propagation PSK Phase Shift Keying PSN Packet Switched Network PSTN QAM QoS Public Switched Telephone Network Quality of Service Meaning A product that helps manage a network generally hosted on a well-equipped computer such as an engineering workstation. The system tracks network statistics and resources. A centralized point, much like a traffic control tower, where technicians or engineers can monitor network activity, alarms, and statistics, as well as make network configuration and other changes dynamically. For Internet, the NOC is often a hub for ISP services. A set of network management functions. Also describes the human-machine interface tasks - i.e., to operate the system, to administer the system, and to maintain the system. A software program that manages the basic operation of a computer. Most Operating Systems are either based on An ISO model for worldwide communications that defines 7 layers of network protocol: L1 Physical Layer; L2 Data Link Layer; L3 Network Layer; L4 Transport Layer; L5 Session Layer; L6 Presentation Layer; L7 Application Layer. Any IBM-compatible computer, so named because IBMs first commercial end user computer was called a PC. A hardware module that holds electronic circuitry and usually fits into a larger frame where the various PCBs are interconnected electronically. A data packet. Refers to that which is exchanged between peer-
layer entities. Contains header, data, and trailer information. Generalized term from sonar science, where a short sound burst is sent out and an echo or ping is received. Used to determine if signals or packets have been dropped, duplicated, or reordered. A protocol that allows dial-up Internet connections. Includes the Link Control Protocol as well as Network Control Protocols. To spread out and affect a greater area; travel through space, as in radio waves. Digital transmission term that means an angle modulation where the phase of the carrier varies in relation to a reference or former phase. An encoded shift. Each change of phase carries one bit of information, where the bit rate equals the modulation rate. A network in which data is transferred in units called packets. Packets can be routed individually and reassembled to form a complete message at the definition. Typically used in the same context as POTS. Analogous to a network of major highways originally built by a single organization but added to and expanded by multiple organizations. AKA, backbone networks. Creates higher throughput but decreased coverage area. A guaranteed throughput for critical network applications, such as Voice over IP. Term primarily used in an ATM environment. Five classes of service: Class 1 Video; Class 2 Audio; Class 3 Data Connection. Quadrature Amplitude ModulationA bandwidth conservation process routinely used in modems. 14 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Radio Frequency Subsystem Receiver Signal Strength Indicator A term that describes the measure of the signal strength in Stands For.... Random Access Memory Radio Frequency Term RAM RF RFS RSSI Rx Receive S-CDMA SMDS SMS Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access Switched Multi-megabit Data Service 1Short Message Service or 2Systems Management Server SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNR Signal-to-noise Ratio SO/HO Small Office/Home Office SSI SW SYN Signal Strength Indicator Software Synthesizer Card SYNCH Synchronous TCC 1Traffic Channel or 2Transmission Control Code TCP Transport Control Protocol TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Meaning Computer memory that can be accessed randomly. A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum in the frequency range between audio and infrared: 100 KHz to 20 GHz. RF measurements are expressed in Hz (unit for measuring frequency); MHz = 1 Million Hz; GHz = 1 Billing Hz. A term for the antenna portion of the base station. kilohertz or gigahertz between the transmission and the receiving end. An abbreviated way of expressing the term, receive, as in to receive a transmission. Wireless technology based on data being transferred at a fixed rate using Code Division Multiple Access algorithms. Connectionless service for MAN/WAN based on 53-byte packets that target the interconnection of different LANs into a public switched network at speeds higher than T1. 1A protocol that allows mobile users to send text-based messages from one device to another. The text appears on a devices screen and may be a maximum 160 characters in length. 2A Windows NT process that allows a network administrator to inventory all hardware and software on the network, then perform software distribution over the LAN. Standard management request-reply protocol for managing TCP/IP networks. A device is said to be SNMP compatible if it can be monitored or controlled using SNMP messages. Related to RSSI, a measurement of the intended signal being transmitted against the other entities that can interfere with the signal. Small, remote office with a MAN or WAN connection back to a larger corporate network and/or the Internet. See RSSI. Computer instructions or data. A circuit card in the Navini BTS digital shelf that provides a local oscillator and system clock with a single calibration transceiver. The card is used to calibrate the Base Station so that no external spectrum analyzer or signal generator is required. Digital packets or signals that are sent at the same, precisely clocked fixed rate of speed. 1A portion of a radio channel used to enable transmission of one direction of a digitized voice conversation (as opposed to the Voice Channel). 2A way of segregating traffic in order to define controlled communities of interest among subscribers. A standardized transport protocol between IP-based network nodes that allows two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP operates on top of Internet Protocols and handles the multiplexing of sessions, error recovery, reliability and flow; it guarantees packets are delivered in the same order in which they were sent. A set of protocols that allows cooperating computers to share resources across the network. TCP provides the reliability in the transmission, while IP provides connectionless packet service. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 15 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Meaning A digital transmission method that combines signals from multiple sources and allows a single channel to alternately carry data in each direction of a link. Memory in a computing device that does not lose its information when powered off. Available as a SIMM or PCMCIA card, it usually stores router Operating System (OS) software. Can be easily updated. A field in the Internet Protocol that specifies how many more hops a packet can travel before being discarded or returned. To send by wire or other medium electronically or through air via electromagnetic waves to a receiving communications device. Describes the direction of signal flow being sent from a subscriber to a network system, as in from a mobile device (CPE) to a base station. An external bus standard for plug-and-play interfaces between a computer and add-on devices, such as a mouse, modem, keyboard, etc. One USB port can connect up to 127 devices. AKA, Virtual Channel Connection or Virtual Circuit Connection. A logical circuit made up of Virtual Channel Links, which carry data between two end points in an ATM network. A 16-bit value in the ATM cell header that provides a unique identifier for the Virtual Channel that carries that particular cell. A connection between two ATM devices. A quantity representative of both magnitude and direction
(energy + orientation in space) AKA, Virtual Path Connection. A grouping of Virtual Channel Connectors, which share one or more contiguous VPLs. A set of Virtual Channels grouped together between cross-points
(i.e., switches). An 8-bit value in the cell header that identifies the VP as well as the VC to which the cell belongs. The VPI + VCI identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches. A group of unidirectional VCLs with the same end points in a Virtual Path. Grouping VCLs into VPLs reduces the number of connections to be managed. One or more VPLs makes up a VPC. 1A communications network that spans geographically separate areas and which provide long-haul services. Examples of inter-
networked connections are frame relay, SMDS, and X.25 protocols. 2 General term for any product primarily used to gain access to the Internet, as opposed to being part of the actual Internet devices or software. Term TDD Stands For.... Time Division Duplex TFFS True Flash File System TTL Tx UL USB Time-to-live Transmit UpLink Universal Serial Bus VCC Virtual Channel Circuit VCI VCL Vector VPC VP VPI Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual Channel Link Vector Virtual Private Channel Virtual Path Virtual Path Identifier VPL Virtual Path Link WAN 1Wide Area Network or 2Wireless Access Network 16 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide ROD ROD ROD LIGHTNING LIGHTNING LIGHTNING Chapter 1: Overview Ripwave Description A Ripwave system has three main components: the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE); the Base Station; and the Element Management System (EMS). The Base Station performs the CPE registration and call processing, and provides the interface between the backhaul network and the EMS. It is made up of the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and the Radio Frequency Subsystem
(RFS) (Figure 1). This manual provides the guidelines and instructions for installing and commissioning (I&C) the Base Station. Figure 1: Base Station Installation With Panel Antenna Note: The illustration shows both Note: The illustration shows both an outdoor and an indoor BTS, an outdoor and an indoor BTS, but only one panel antenna. In but only one panel antenna. In reality, each BTS requires reality, each BTS requires its own panel. its own panel. 24VDC @ 60A 24VDC @ 60A 24VDC @ 60A ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET TELCO TELCO TELCO SELF SUPPORTING SELF SUPPORTING SELF SUPPORTING GUIDE GUIDE GUIDE OPTION 2 OPTION 2 OPTION 2 OUTDOOR BTS OUTDOOR BTS OUTDOOR BTS PSX PSX PSX GROUND BAR GROUND BAR GROUND BAR CABLE CABLE CABLE LADDER LADDER LADDER GROUND GROUND GROUND ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET
/ TELCO
/ TELCO
/ TELCO CABINET CABINET CABINET PSX-ME PSX-ME PSX-ME PROTECTOR PROTECTOR PROTECTOR OPTION 1 OPTION 1 OPTION 1 INDOOR BTS INDOOR BTS INDOOR BTS ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA BRACKET BRACKET BRACKET PANEL PANEL PANEL ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA TOWER ANTENNA TOWER ANTENNA TOWER SHELTER / HUT SHELTER / HUT SHELTER / HUT CABLE LADDER CABLE LADDER CABLE LADDER GROUND BAR GROUND BAR GROUND BAR RF CABLES RF CABLES RF CABLES 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
@ 60A
@ 60A
@ 60A OVERHEAD OVERHEAD OVERHEAD CABINET CABINET CABINET NAVINI NAVINI NAVINI GROUND GROUND GROUND CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLEENTRY CABLEENTRY CABLEENTRY GND GND GND GPS GPS GPS BAR BAR BAR PSX PSX PSX BTS BTS BTS GND GND GND HANGERS HANGERS HANGERS SURGE SURGE SURGE BAR BAR BAR Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 17 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Procedural Documents & Forms You will refer to other Ripwave documents, procedures, and forms in the process of installing and commissioning the Base Station. They are listed in Appendix A of this manual. The product documentation is provided on the Ripwave Standard Documentation CD (Table 1). As well, the EMS manuals can be viewed on-line through the EMS Server and Client applications. Table 1: Ripwave Standard Documentation CD Order Number 95-00116-00 EMS Overview Manual EMS Software Installation EMS Administration Guide Ripwave Configuration Guide EMS CLI Reference Manual Ripwave Alarm Resolution Reference Manual Ripwave Base Station Operations & Maintenance Guide Ripwave RFS Configuration Quick Guide EMS Diagnostic Tools Guide Ripwave Modem Quick Installation Guide English Spanish Ripwave Modem User Guide English Spanish Ripwave Modem Software Update Tool Guide Component or Part Number 40-00016-03 40-00017-00 40-00031-00 40-00016-01 40-00016-02 40-00033-00 00-00046-00 40-00067-00 40-00032-00 40-00112-00 40-00098-00 40-00096-00 40-00111-00 40-00097-00 40-00099-00 40-00066-00 Format MSWord/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf A separate CD specifically created for personnel involved with installation and commissioning of the Ripwave system, called VAR I&C Documentation, may be ordered by authorized business partners and customers. The CD includes detailed procedures and electronic forms that are used during the I&C process. Table 2 contains a partial listing of the files on this CD, while Appendix A provides the complete list. The I&C forms found on the CD are referenced throughout this manual, and copies are included in the appendices. Table 2: VAR I&C Documentation CD Order Number 95-00017-00 RFS Omni & Panel Data Sheets Site Candidate Evaluation Form RFS System Test Form Base Station Calibration Verification Form Drive Study Survey Form Location (FTP) Test Form Customer Acceptance Form BTS Outdoor Selection Guide Rectifier/Battery Backup Specification Part Number Format 44-00037/38-00 40-00091-00 40-00093-00 40-00059-00 40-00076-00 40-00077-00 40-00117-00 44-00035-00 44-00036-00 Excel (includes drawings) Excel Spreadsheet Excel Spreadsheet Excel Spreadsheet Excel Spreadsheet Excel Spreadsheet MS Word Document MS Word Document MS Word Document 18 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Site Engineering Installation Commissioning Acceptance Testing and sign-off I&C Process Flowchart To put the I&C activities in the context of overall system deployment, Figure 2 provides a flow of the key activities that are performed prior to and during the installation and commissioning of the Ripwave Base Station. Post-I&C, the system that has been installed and commissioned goes through Acceptance Testing against the customers objectives for that site. Once customer sign-
off on the site is achieved, the customer becomes fully responsible for operating the system. Different job holders may perform various portions of these activities and not necessarily all of the activities. In fact, Marketing and Engineering personnel typically handle the earlier tasks, while installation may be a stand-alone function. Commissioning may or may not be handled by the same people who designed or installed the site. Regardless of who does them, these key activities have to be accomplished for successful deployment:
Prior to installation, Navini and the customer formulate a Project Plan and Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM) to clarify who will do what to complete the I&C activities. If requested by the customer, Navini may provide personnel, procedures, forms, and/or tools required to install and commission the Base Station equipment. They may also provide special commissioning software programs, computers, and any other special test equipment required. As part of the I&C duties, all testing results are recorded and kept for the customer to review and approve. These test results include the cable sweeps, the BTS Calibration Verification, RF System Tests, Drive Study, Line-of-Sight (LOS) FTP tests, and Non-Line-of-Sight (NLOS) FTP test results. The I&C Supervisor provides site tracking and weekly status reports. All of these tasks can be negotiated with the customer. If Navini Networks is hired by a customer to provide Installation & Commissioning Services, involvement and some actual deliverables are still required by the customer. For example, the customer will need to review or perhaps even explain their Site Design Specifications, approve Logistics Plans, provide shipping information, approve the Network Architecture Plan, etc. As part of a successful hand-off from Navini to the customer, it is usually necessary for Navini to provide some product training to customer personnel who will support the Base Station operation on-going. Customers may opt to take on a Train-the-Trainer program, in which case Navini certifies the customers instructors who then provide staff training thereafter. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 19 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Tool. Tool. for customer for customer prediction map prediction map 2-Generate coverage 2-Generate coverage 1-Complete Project Plan 1-Complete Project Plan 4-Acquire chosen customer 4-Acquire chosen customer Site Engineering Site Engineering 3-Conduct site survey 3-Conduct site survey
& complete the Site
& complete the Site Candidate Evaluation Form. Candidate Evaluation Form. Complete the Interference Complete the Interference Analysis/CPE Site Survey Analysis/CPE Site Survey Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart Click here to link to Appendix B or to Appendix P. backhaul & EMS Server backhaul & EMS Server Hardware & FTP Server Hardware & FTP Server are installed & operational are installed & operational 5-Perform Network 5-Perform Network Architecture design Architecture design 6-Develop Bill of Materials 6-Develop Bill of Materials 8-Confirm customer 8-Confirm customer 7-Acquire materials 7-Acquire materials site information site information
(BOM)
(BOM) End End Appendix B:
Appendix B:
Site Candidate Site Candidate Evaluation Form Evaluation Form Sample BoM provided Sample BoM provided in Appendix P in Appendix P 20 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart, contd. Installation Installation 1-From shipping containers received at 1-From shipping containers received at customer site, gather Manufacturings inventory customer site, gather Manufacturings inventory sheet & test data collected from the BTS & RFS sheet & test data collected from the BTS & RFS equipment shipped. Verify all equipment arrived, equipment shipped. Verify all equipment arrived, the test data is available, & serial numbers match the test data is available, & serial numbers match paperwork. Keep as part of customer site records. paperwork. Keep as part of customer site records. Appendix C:
Appendix C:
RFS System RFS System Test Form Test Form 2-Install all system buss 2-Install all system buss bars & surge protectors bars & surge protectors 3-Install & sweep RF 3-Install & sweep RF cables. Record results on cables. Record results on RFS System Test Form. RFS System Test Form. 4-Install & sweep 4-Install & sweep GPS cables GPS cables 5-Test & install 5-Test & install data/power cable data/power cable 6- If required, install 6- If required, install BTS mounting rack BTS mounting rack 7-Install BTS chassis 7-Install BTS chassis 8-Install & verify 8-Install & verify BTS & RFS grounding BTS & RFS grounding A A Click here to link to Appendix C. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 21 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 12-Install RFS & surge protectors. 12-Install RFS & surge protectors. Connect 9 RF cables & data/power Connect 9 RF cables & data/power 11-Sweep the RFS. Record the results 11-Sweep the RFS. Record the results and the RFS serial numbers on the RFS and the RFS serial numbers on the RFS A A cable to the RFS. cable to the RFS. System Test Form. System Test Form. 9-Install & verify DC 9-Install & verify DC 10-Install GPS antennas 10-Install GPS antennas input power source to BTS input power source to BTS Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart, contd. Click here to link to Appendix D. customer demarcation point. customer demarcation point. installed & seated properly. installed & seated properly. RFS System Test Form. RFS System Test Form. B B 15-Record serial numbers & version 15-Record serial numbers & version numbers of digital & PA cards on the Base numbers of digital & PA cards on the Base Station Installation Certification Form. Station Installation Certification Form. 16-If required in Responsibility Assignment 16-If required in Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM), test the backhaul to the Matrix (RAM), test the backhaul to the 13-Sweep installed RFS & cables to verify 13-Sweep installed RFS & cables to verify connections & cable loss. Record results on connections & cable loss. Record results on 14-Verify digital cards & PA cards are 14-Verify digital cards & PA cards are Appendix D:
Appendix D:
Base Station Base Station Installation Installation Certification Certification Form Form 22 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide B B Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart, contd. customer on-site. customer on-site. End End 18-Go over results using forms &` get 18-Go over results using forms &` get customer sign-off on Installation using customer sign-off on Installation using Base Station Site Installation Form. Base Station Site Installation Form. 17-Provide printed package of measured 17-Provide printed package of measured results & equipment inventory to results & equipment inventory to Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 23 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 3a-Install & configure* the Test 3a-Install & configure* the Test EMS Server & Client. Connect EMS Server & Client. Connect to the BTS. to the BTS.
*Appendix E:
*Appendix E:
Configuration Configuration Data Forms Data Forms Commissioning Commissioning No No
Yes Yes 2-Are you using 2-Are you using
(i.e., T1 vs. Ethernet)
(i.e., T1 vs. Ethernet) the customer the customer EMS Server EMS Server 1-Review customer network plans 1-Review customer network plans 3b-Install & configure* the 3b-Install & configure* the customer EMS Server &
customer EMS Server &
Client. Connect to the BTS. Client. Connect to the BTS. 4-Enter the RFS configuration 4-Enter the RFS configuration by running the RFS script that by running the RFS script that shipped with the antenna eqpt. shipped with the antenna eqpt. Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart, contd. Click here to link to Appendix E. 6-Power up BTS & reconfigure Boot 6-Power up BTS & reconfigure Boot Line configuration data through the Line configuration data through the 7-After BTS has been powered up 7-After BTS has been powered up at least 15 minutes, perform at least 15 minutes, perform 5-Verify all cables are 5-Verify all cables are 3 calibrations. 3 calibrations. calibration calibration
Yes Yes serial port. serial port. connected connected 8-Pass 8-Pass No No A A 9a-Perform system 9a-Perform system troubleshooting procedures. troubleshooting procedures. 24 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix F:
Appendix F:
Base Station Base Station Calibration Calibration Verification Verification Form Form 11a-Perform system 11a-Perform system troubleshooting procedures troubleshooting procedures Verify and record measurements on the Verify and record measurements on the Base Station Calibration Verification Form. Base Station Calibration Verification Form.
A A No No Yes Yes CPE test CPE test 11b-Perform local wireline 11b-Perform local wireline 10-Pass 10-Pass calibration calibration verification verification 9b-Perform Base Station calibration 9b-Perform Base Station calibration Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart, contd. Click here to link to Appendix F. 13-Perform local over-the-air 13-Perform local over-the-air 12-Wireline 12-Wireline CPE test CPE test 14-OTA 14-OTA CPE test CPE test
(OTA) CPE test
(OTA) CPE test pass pass pass pass Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No B B
Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 25 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. No No C C 16-Install & configure the 16-Install & configure the customer EMS Server & Client. customer EMS Server & Client. Connect to the BTS. Connect to the BTS. B B
Yes Yes 15-Test 15-Test EMS used EMS used Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart, contd. D D 17-Verify EMS Server 17-Verify EMS Server
& BTS connectivity.
& BTS connectivity. 18-Perform calibration. Ensure 18-Perform calibration. Ensure successful results 3 times. successful results 3 times. 26 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide
*NOTE: Step 19 is performed
*NOTE: Step 19 is performed only if no RF plot is available. only if no RF plot is available. Appendix G:
Appendix G:
Drive Study Drive Study Form Form Appendix H:
Appendix H:
FTP Test FTP Test Form Form No No 24a-Adjust RF parameters &
24a-Adjust RF parameters &
troubleshoot. Go back to troubleshoot. Go back to Step 17, Perform calibration. Step 17, Perform calibration. 19*-Validate that the GPS & constellation 19*-Validate that the GPS & constellation debugger are installed & operational on debugger are installed & operational on the Drive Study computer. Perform the Drive Study computer. Perform preliminary Drive Study. Record results preliminary Drive Study. Record results on the Drive Study Form. on the Drive Study Form. 20-Perform preliminary LOS Location 20-Perform preliminary LOS Location
(FTP) testing. Perform 3 uploads & 3
(FTP) testing. Perform 3 uploads & 3 downloads at 3 locations. Record results on downloads at 3 locations. Record results on the FTP Test Form. the FTP Test Form. 21-Perform preliminary NLOS Location 21-Perform preliminary NLOS Location
(FTP) testing. Perform 3 uploads & 3
(FTP) testing. Perform 3 uploads & 3 downloads at 3 locations. Record results on downloads at 3 locations. Record results on the FTP Test Form. the FTP Test Form. C C D D Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart, contd. Click here to link to Appendix G. Click here to link to Appendix H. 23-Results 23-Results adequate adequate for evaluation. for evaluation. Yes Yes E E
22-Send all preliminary test results 22-Send all preliminary test results to Navini Technical Support to Navini Technical Support Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 27 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. E E 27-Send test results to 27-Send test results to 24b-Perform full Drive Study, & record 24b-Perform full Drive Study, & record 25-Perform full LOS Location 25-Perform full LOS Location
(FTP) testing. Record results.
(FTP) testing. Record results. 26-Perform full NLOS Location 26-Perform full NLOS Location
(FTP) testing. Record results.
(FTP) testing. Record results. results on the Drive Study Form. results on the Drive Study Form. This is used for tuning the model. This is used for tuning the model. Figure 2: I&C Process Flowchart, contd. Click here to link to Appendix I. 30-Gather all required documents &
30-Gather all required documents &
forms to create a delivery package forms to create a delivery package for the customer sign-off & for the for the customer sign-off & for the Navini Technical Support database. Navini Technical Support database. 31-Participate in customer sign-off 31-Participate in customer sign-off 28-Verify system operation with 28-Verify system operation with of Customer Acceptance Form. of Customer Acceptance Form. 29-Back up the EMS database 29-Back up the EMS database multiple CPE devices. multiple CPE devices. Tech Support Tech Support End End Appendix I:
Appendix I:
Customer Customer Acceptance Acceptance Form Form 28 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Combo Chassis Combo Chassis Base Station Components Base Transceiver Station (BTS) The BTS consists of the RF Power Amplifiers (PAs), the digital circuit cards, the backplane, and the mechanical enclosure or housing. It performs the signal processing and RF transmission for the system. There are two types of chassis: Combo and Split. The Combo Chassis is used primarily with 2.4 GHz systems. The Split Chasses is used for all other (2.3, 2.5, 2.6 GHz) systems (Figure 3). The chassis is compartmentalized into two sections - the RF shelf and the Digital shelf. The BTS connects to the network using a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connection or up to 8 T1 interfaces. Up to three BTS assemblies can be installed per system, depending on the configuration. Figure 3: BTS Chassis Digital Shelf Digital Shelf
(Circuit Cards)
(Circuit Cards) Split Chassis Split Chassis
(Power Amplifiers)
(Power Amplifiers) RF Shelf RF Shelf Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 29 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Panel (Front) Panel (Front) Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS) The Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS) is mounted on a transmission tower or building rooftop. It transmits and receives data to and from the Ripwave Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) using a digital beamforming transmission technique. The RFS may be either a panel antenna or an omni antenna (Figure 4). An RFS panel transmits in a directional mode, covering a transmit angle of 120 degrees. The antenna can be used as a single mode antenna, or it can be used in a group of two or three sectored antennas, covering 240 and 360 degrees respectively. Each panel requires a BTS to operate. For example, in a tri-sectored cell with 3 panels, you would need 3 BTSs. The omni antenna provides omni-directional coverage of 360 degrees. An RFS panel or omni contains eight (8) antenna elements, cavity filters, and, optionally, low noise amplifiers (LNA). For downtilt, the omni must be situated as it comes from the factory. A panels downtilt can be adjusted at the site. The higher up the antenna is placed, the more downtilt it typically required. Figure 4: RFS Panel (Back) Panel (Back) Omni Omni 30 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide VIC 100 GPS VIC 100 GPS Global Positioning System (GPS) One or two Global Positioning System (GPS) antennas are used with each Base Station. A GPS antenna works with a constellation of satellites that orbit the earth, and it provides the ability to pinpoint geographical locations. The two types of GPS antennas that may be ordered with a Ripwave Base Station are the VIC 100 and the Motorola Timing 2000 (Figure 5). Figure 5: GPS Antennas Motorola Timing Motorola Timing 2000 GPS 2000 GPS Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 31 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Mounting Racks & Enclosures The BTS can be installed indoors or outdoors in industry standard 19- or 23-inch racks. Rack adapters are needed to mount the equipment in a standard 23-inch rack. For outdoor BTSs, the customer can supply any standard enclosure from a multitude of vendors. Appendix J offers suggestions for outdoor BTS enclosures. Figure 6 shows 3 BTSs installed indoors. Figure 6: Indoor BTS Data/Power Cable Lightning Arrestors Across Top Data/Power Cable Lightning Arrestors Across Top 32 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide General Specifications Input Power The BTS requires +21 to 28 VDC power supply rated at 60 amps. Installers are referred to industry standards for power supply installations. Humidity The operating environment of the BTS must control relative humidity to 5% to 95% RH, non-
condensing. Heat Dissipation The combo BTS chassis, under normal operating conditions, will dissipate a maximum of 1000 Watts or 3415 BTUs. The split chassis will dissipate a maximum of 1500 watts. Airflow Fresh air intake for the BTS chassis is along the lower front vertical panel. Exhaust is out of the upper rear of the chassis. The I&C crew must ensure there are no obstacles to airflow present in these areas. Exhaust air from other equipment should not mix with the BTS fresh air intake. Accessibility The BTS is intended for installation and use only in a restricted access location. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 33 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Base Station Specifications Current Ripwave operating frequencies include those shown in Table 3. Testing on other frequencies is underway and soon will be commercially available. Table 3: Operating Frequencies Model 2.3 GHz 2.4 GHz 2.5 GHz 2.6 GHz Frequency Range 2.305 GHz to 2.359 GHz 2.40 GHz - 2.473 GHz 2.50 GHz - 2.595 GHz 2.602 GHz 2.637 GHz Operating Band WCS ISM MMDS/ITFS MMDS/ITFS Chassis Split Combo Split Split The Ripwave Base Station can be in a combo chassis or split chassis system. The split chassis is for MMDS bands only; it is not available for 2.4 GHz systems. The specifications for the combo and split chassis are shown in Tables 4 and 5. Table 4: Combo Chassis System (ISM Systems) Antenna Downtilt:
Antenna Gain:
Antenna Options:
Backhaul Interfaces:
Bandwidth Allocation:
Baseband Modulation:
Beamforming Gain:
Configurations:
DC Power Consumption:
Duplex Format:
Mechanical Dimensions:
Multiple Access Schemes:
Operational Frequency Band:
Operational Temperature:
Polarization:
Power Control:
Regulatory:
Reliability/Availability:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
RF Output Power (per channel):
Sensitivity:
Serviceability:
Spreading Spectrum Scheme:
Storage Temperature:
System Features:
2 & 4 degree options for Omni-directional; Mechanical for 120 degree Sectored 12dBi Omni-directional, 17 dBi for 120-degree Sectored Omni-directional or 120-degree Sectored 10/100 BaseT Ethernet or ATM over T1; up to (8) T1s with or without IMA, long haul support Dynamic Uplink QAM4 18dB Omni-directional or Sectored; Indoor or Outdoor 21VDC to 28VDC @ 40 amps; 1000 watts Time Division Duplexing (TDD) 30x19x14 for indoor BTS (single cell/sector), 60x15diameter for omni RFS antenna, 46x23 sectored RFS antenna Multi-carrier Beamforming Synchronized (MCBS) CDMA See Table 3 0 to +50 degrees C (indoor); -40 to +50 degrees C (outdoor) Vertical Forward & reverse, open & closed loop UL 1950, FCC part 15 Load-sharing 6MHz 5 watts max
-114 dBm/single channel (NF of 5dB) Field replaceable cards, EMS remote reset Direct Sequence Spreading (DSS)
-40 to +70 degrees C Reed Soloman forward error correction (FEC), congestion control, automatic 34 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide repeat request (ARQ), extensive GoS/QoS mechanisms 12 Mbps (fully loaded max raw data rate downstream + upstream) Symmetrical TDD Software downloads 100 lbs (indoor BTS), 64 lbs (RFS antenna) System Throughput:
Up/down Link Duplex:
Upgradeability:
Weight:
Table 5: Split Chassis System (MMDS & WCS Systems) Antenna Downtilt:
Antenna Gain:
Antenna Options:
Backhaul Interfaces:
Bandwidth Allocation:
Baseband Modulation:
Beamforming Gain:
Configurations:
DC Power Consumption:
DC Power Interface:
Duplex Format:
Humidity:
Mechanical Dimensions:
Multiple Access Schemes:
Operational Frequency Band:
Operational Temperature:
Polarization:
Power Control:
Regulatory:
Reliability/Availability:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
RF Output Power (per channel):
Sensitivity:
Serviceability:
Spreading Spectrum Scheme:
Storage Temperature:
System Features:
System Throughput:
Up/down Link Duplex:
Upgradeability:
Weight:
2 & 4 degree options for Omni-directional; Mechanical for 120 degree Sectored 12dBi Omni-directional, 17 dBi for 120-degree Sectored Omni-directional or 120-degree Sectored 10/100 BaseT Ethernet or ATM over T1; up to (8) T1s with or without IMA, long haul support Dynamic Uplink QAM4 18dB RFS Omni-directional or Sectored. 1 BTS per antenna. 21VDC to 28VDC; 1353 Watts typical, 1500 Watts maximum 2 - lugs for +24V DC and 24V return. Time Division Duplexing (TDD) 0 to 95% non-condensing Digital: H19.2 X W19.0 X D12.9 (add ~1.3 to D with modules installed). RF: H14.0 X W19.0 XD15.2 (add ~1.5 to D with modules installed). Multi-carrier Beamforming Synchronized (MCBS) CDMA See Table 3 0 to +50 degrees C (indoor); -40 to +50 degrees C (outdoor) Vertical Forward & reverse, open & closed loop UL 1950, FCC part 15 Load-sharing 6MHz 5 watts max
-114 dBm/single channel (NF of 5dB) Field replaceable cards, EMS remote reset; Front and rear access required Direct Sequence Spreading (DSS)
-40 to +70 degrees C Reed Soloman forward error correction (FEC), congestion control, automatic repeat request (ARQ), extensive GoS/QoS mechanisms 12 Mbps (fully loaded max raw data rate downstream + upstream) Symmetrical or Asymmetrical TDD with a maximum of 3:1 ratio for down/up allocations Software downloads Digital Shelf 35 lbs + RF Shelf 82 lbs. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 35 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Materials Specifications The Base Station installation requires general materials and parts for installation. In Table 6 is a partial list of the items that may be used for a typical installation of the Ripwave Base Station. A more complete list is provided in Appendix O. The quantity and use of materials will vary depending on the specific installation. The lists in Table 6 and in Appendix O are based on a 150-foot site. Table 6: Materials Specifications Base Station General Materials Requirements List BTS Install Kit 96-05000-00 Description Supplier Rqd Qty Lightning Rod Ground Rod Ground Wire Ground Wire Ground Buss Bar (Tower) Ground Buss Bar (Shelter) Ground Lug Ground Lug Ground Lug Grounding Kit (1/2"), LMR600 Grounding Kit (3/8"), LMR400 Grounding Kit (1/2"), RF-1/2"
Universal Grounding kits RFS Antenna RFS Surge Protector RFS Antenna Mount Weatherproofing kits RFS Antenna Power Cable RFS Antenna Jumper Cable Mounting Clamps Mounting Clamps RFS Cable RFS Type N Male Connectors Hoisting Grips Cushion Hangers 1/2"
Cushion Hangers 3/8"
Angle Adapter Cross Cushion Hanger Mounts Universal Hanger 1/2"
Support Blocks RFS Connector RFS Connector RFS Connector RFS Connector GROUNDING Lightning Rod - 8'
Tinned copper ground rod, 5/8" x 8'
# 2 Stranded green ground wire
# 6 AWG Stranded Green Wire Ground buss bar kit, 1/4" x 2-1/2" x 12-1/2"
Copper Gnd buss bar, 1/4" x 4", drilled to 5/8"
#6, One Hole
#6, Two Hole
#2, Two Hole STD Ground kit, LMR-600, 5' x 3/8" 2 hole lug STD Ground kit, LMR-400, 5' x 3/8" 2 hole lug Ground Kit, RF-1/2", 2 hole lug Universal grounding kit, 3' with 3/8" 2 hole lug ANTENNA SYSTEM Omni Antenna RFS surge protector Omni Antenna Mount Universal weatherproofing kit, Large RFFE Power/Data Main Cable assembly RFFE Power/Data Jumper cable, 10 Feet. Crossover Clamp, 1.5" x 3.5" OD Pipe to pipe clamps, kit of 2 MAIN FEEDER LMR 600, 1/2" coaxial cable EZ600 N type, Male connectors Pre-laced Hoisting Grip, 1/2"
Cushion hanger assembly, 5H, 1/2", kit of 5 Cushion hanger assembly, 6H, 3/8" for LMR400 Adapter, Galvanized, Angle kit of 10 Cross cushion hanger mount, kit of 5 Hanger, Universal, Snap-In, 1/2", kit of 10 Mini Coax Support Blocks, kit of 10 MALE, N TYPE, 3/8 INCH MALE, N TYPE, 5/8 INCH MALE, N TYPE, 1/2 INCH MALE, N TYPE, 7/8 INCH MTS MTS MTS LOCKE MTS ALT T&B T&B T&B MTS MTS NK Cables MTS Navini POLYPHASER MTS MTS Probity Probity MTS MTS HUTTON/TIMES HUTTON/TIMES MTS MTS MTS MTS MTS NK Cables MTS NK Cables NK Cables NK Cables NK Cables 50 Ft 50 Ft 1 Kit 1 Kit 3 Pcs 6 Pcs 2 Pcs 27 Kits 2 Kits 9 Pcs 1 Kit 2 Kits 1 Kit 1 Kit 1 Kit 1 Kit 1350 Ft 36 Pcs 10 Pcs 12 kits 6 Kits 2 Kits 36 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide RFS Connector RFS Connector RFS Connector RFS Connector RFS Connector RFS Connector Weatherproofing RFS Cable RFS Cable RFS Cable RFS Cable GPS Antenna GPS Surge Protector GPS Surge Protector GPS Cable GPS Type N Male Connectors FEMALE, N TYPE, 5/8 INCH FEMALE, N TYPE, 7/8 INCH N STRAIGHT PLUG, EZ PIN, FEMALE (LMR400) N RIGHT ANGLE, EZ PIN, MALE (LMR400) N RIGHT ANGLE, SOLDER PIN, MALE (LMR400) N STRAIGHT, SOLDER PIN,MALE (LMR400) Sealing Compound, Coax Cable Connector CABLE, COAX, RF, CORRUGATED, 3/8 INCH CABLE, COAX, RF, CORRUGATED, 5/8 INCH CABLE, COAX, RF, CORRUGATED, 1/2 INCH CABLE, COAX, RF, CORRUGATED, 7/8 INCH GPS SYSTEM GPS Antenna, N-type Female GPS surge protector, Redundant GPS surge protector, Non-redundant LMR400, 3/8" coaxial cable EZ400 N type, Male connectors ENTRY PORT SYSTEM NK Cables NK Cables HUTTON/TIMES HUTTON/TIMES HUTTON/TIMES HUTTON/TIMES NK Cables NK Cables NK Cables NK Cables NK Cables Motorola POLYPHASER POLYPHASER HUTTON/TIMES HUTTON/TIMES Goose Neck - J type Hood entry Feed Thru Entry Panel Boot Assembly Kits Boot Assembly Kit, 4" w/ 4 holes (LMR 600) TBD TBD MTS Ripwave 2400 BTS BTS Surge Protector 24 VDC Power Supply DC Power Wire DC Power Wire BREAKER ROUTER SERIAL WAN T1-IMA MODULE Air conditioning 110 VAC Power Outlets Telco / Ethernet Connectors RJ45 Expanding Foam Sealer Bolts (Ground) Nuts (Ground) Flat Washer (Ground) Lock Washer (Ground) Star Washer (Ground) Star Washer (BTS Chassis Ground) Nut (BTS, Power/Data Surge P) Equipment Open Rack Tie wraps Split Bolt #2/0 Uni-Struts Anchor/Expansion Bolts Cable Ladder BTS SYSTEM BTS surge protector
# 6 AWG, Stranded, RED Wire
# 6 AWG, Stranded, BLACK Wire 24 VDC, 60A Distribution Breaker CISCO 2600 Dual 10/100 ENET, WIC/NM Slots Serial Interface WAN Card, One Port Multiport T1/E1 Network Module with IMA MISCELLANEOUS Bolt, Hex, 1/4-20 x 1.000 LG, SSPA Nut, Reg, Hex, Cres, 1/4-20UNC Wash, Flat, Cres, #6 T-B-Reg .156x.438x.040 Wash, Lock. Split, Cres 1/4, Reg .252x.487x.062 Wash, Star, 1/4 Wash, Star, #10 Nut, Hex, #10-24 Rack, 19" x 72" with 1/4" x 1" holes Navini POLYPHASER Argus Argus CISCO CISCO CISCO TBD TBD TBD TBD QUESTRON QUESTRON QUESTRON QUESTRON QUESTRON QUESTRON QUESTRON CHATSWORTH TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD 2 Pcs 2 Pcs 1 Pc 200 Ft 8 Pcs 4 Kits 9 Pcs 1 Unit Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 37 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 38 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2: Installation Pre-installation As was shown in Figure 2, prior to installation a number of planning activities take place. The installation itself takes only about 2 days. The I&C crew usually is not involved with all the pre-
installation activities. Of these, they are likely to be most involved in the Site Candidate Evaluation. Project Plan A Project Plan is a document that lays out the work to be done, the objectives of the project, the schedule, resources required, and so forth. If Navini is performing the I&C activities, a Project Manager is assigned. The Project Manager prepares the Project Plan and shares it with the Navini and customer teams. Coverage Prediction Map Early in the planning of deployment of Ripwave Base Station equipment, an RF Engineer will go through the process of studying the RF environment of the candidate sites that the customer has identified. Readings are taken and analyzed at each site in order to predict what range of coverage can be expected from installing a Base Station at the site. Coverage predictions account for both Base Station performance as well as Marketing objectives with the service itself. The customer accomplishes the latter as part of the decisions concerning site selection. Site Candidate Evaluation Often Technicians will be very comfortable with either the networking side or the wireless side of the system, but not usually both. To evaluate a potential install site, a form is used to ensure all aspects of the site have been considered. Information is recorded on the form. Since each site is unique, the form helps to ensure nothing is taken for granted or assumed about the installation site for the Ripwave equipment. A copy of this form may be found in Appendix B. It includes places to capture the logistics of the site, tower or rooftop mount possibilities, GPS coordinates, type of antenna to be installed, whether or not an outdoor enclosure is provided, power availability, distance between connection points, ventilation, a place for drawings from every angle, etc. It is from this information that the site will be designed, then installed to plan. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 39 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Interference Analysis The RF Engineer(s) also analyzes existing interference from other sources, and takes that into account when creating the coverage prediction map. In addition to coverage, though, the interference analysis also helps to predict the quality of service, the power requirements to get above the noise floor, and other expectations regarding the site. This study will help Navini and the customer decide which type of system (frequency) and antenna (panel or omni) will provide the best results. Network Architecture Plan The IP Networking community involved in the project, both from Navini and the customer, work together to analyze and plan how the Ripwave system will be integrated into the customers network. Of course, they are looking for efficient operation of the system and seamless integration. They have to plan the traffic routing, IP addressing, protocol compatibility, and so forth. Bill of Materials Someone has to generate the Bill of Materials (BoM) - the actual equipment order to be manufactured and shipped to the installation site. Navini can provide part numbers and ordering information, as well as recommendations and other details that will assist customers in the correct placement of orders. There is a sample Bill of Materials in Appendix O. Backhaul Connections The Backhaul connections for the Ripwave Base Station consist of up to two (2) Ethernet cable connections with RJ-45 connectors for each BTS installed, OR, up to eight (8) T1 connections with RJ-48 connectors for each BTS. The quantity of each connection will depend on the site requirements. These connections need to be made available before installation begins. Power Requirements for the Base Station The input power source will be determined during the site survey. The DC power source needs to be an independent hard-wired circuit of 21VDC to 28VDC with a 50-amp breaker for the Combo Chassis and a 70-amp breaker for the Split Chassis. The power plant return bus must be connected to an earth ground connection similar to the Base Station chassis. Insulated #6 AWG cable is recommended. The combo chassis system generates up to 1000 Watts, and the split chassis system generates up to 1500 Watts maximum; however, 1353 Watts is typical. 40 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Ground Requirements for the Base Station The Base Station requires an earth ground connection. This ground should exhibit a maximum of five ohms across true ground. NOTE: The installation procedures, which begin next, follow the same order as shown in the I&C Flowchart in Figure 2. An example of a Base Station drawing for a particular site is provided in Appendix P. An example of a written Statement of Work (SOW) and Responsibility Assignment Matrix
(RAM) for installation and commissioning are provided in Appendices Q and R. This type of document may be used in negotiating work between companies and contractor services. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 41 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Install Power & Grounding System Ground Buss Bar & Surge Protectors The Base Station system ground buss bar and data/power cable surge protectors are mounted on the wall adjacent to the BTS rack or enclosure. They should be mounted per accepted telecom standards and procedures. Step 1. Mount the data/power cable surge protectors (Figure 7) with the label lines toward the RFS and the label BTS toward the BTS. Step 2. Apply a thin coat of anti-oxidant joint compound to both sides of the system ground buss bar to ensure proper connection between it and the surge protectors. Figure 7: Data/Power Cable Surge Protector To install the eight (8) antenna and one (1) cal cable surge protectors (Figure 8), and the one (1) or two (2) Global Positioning System (GPS) surge protectors (Figure 9) in the system ground buss bar, follow the steps below. 1. Install the rubber gasket into the groove in the surge protector. 2. Install the surge protector in the system ground buss bar with the surge side toward the antenna and the protected side toward the BTS. 3. Install the star washer and nut on the top of the surge protector. Torque the nut to 140-150 inch-pounds. 4. When finished, the mounted surge protectors in the buss bar will appear as in Figure 10. 42 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure 8: Antenna & Cal Cable Surge Protector Figure 9: GPS Cable Surge Protector Figure 10: Surge Protectors in Buss Bar Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 43 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Antenna Ground Buss Bar You should install the Antenna Ground Buss Bar on the mounting structure per accepted telecom standards and procedures (Figure 11). The location is decided on during the site survey and should be close to the RFS. Two or more buss bars may be installed per system. Figure 11: Buss Bars System Ground Wiring A minimum #6 stranded copper, green-coated wire and grounding hardware are used for ground connections. Install the system ground as a single-point connection between the system ground buss bars, the data/power surge protector, the BTS chassis, the BTS mounting rack, and the RFS antenna. Connect the system ground to earth ground. Apply anti-oxidant joint compound to all connections. Tighten all connections until secure. Antenna Buss Bar Antenna Buss Bar BTS Buss Bar BTS Buss Bar 44 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Install Cables All cable connections are made using standard RF coaxial cable. The Navini Networks standard for cable connections from the GPS to the BTS is LMR 400, 3/8-inch coaxial cable. Other types of cable that are comparable may be used. Using Tables 7 and 8, determine the size and type of cable to be used in the installation of the Base Station. Table 7: Active & Passive RFS Loss / Operating Parameters CAL Cable Min Loss CAL Cable Max Loss RF Cable Min Loss
[dB]
Active RFS Loss Typ
[dB]
Passive RFS Loss Typ
[dB]
Notes TX Pwr to Ant Max
[dBm]
RX Power to Ant Min
[dBm]
RX Power to Ant Max
[dBm]
PA Max Output Power
[dBm]
2.3 2.4
+38
+37 BTS Max Output power with
*Filter
[dBm]
+37 N/A 2.4
+37 N/A 3.0 4.0 3.0 6.0 9.5 4.5 0 0 0 3.2 3.2 3.2 1.7 1.7 1.7 TX Pwr to Ant Min
[dBm]
20 10 18 35 25 30 35 35 35
-95
-85
-95
-95
-95
-75
-65
-70
-75
-75
-95
-75
-05 SYN
-01 SYN
-05 SYN Super flex FSJ 4-
50B 0.520 5.09 5.67 5.8 5.94 0.14 3 LMR 500 0.500 4.84 5.4 5.48 5.6 0.1 1.25 3/8 LDF 2-
50A 0.440 5.17 5.67 5.91 5.91 0.08 3.75 LMR 400 0.405 6 6.6 6.8 6.9 0.07 1 0 4.5 3.0 0 0
+37
+35 20 20 1.7 1.7 3.2 3.2 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0
+38
+38
+39
+39 2.5 2.6 EF GH 2.6 EF
* Channel filter for 2.5/2.6 or Block Filter for 2.3 has 1.0 +/- 0.2 dB Insertion Loss
* Channel filter for 2.6 EF Combo is 1.8 +/- 0.2 dB including cable to backplane. Table 8: Cable Attenuation in dB per 100 Feet Cable Type 3.2 1.7 20 2 LDF 12-50 1 5/8 LDF 7-
50A LMR 1700 1 LDF 6-
50A LMR 1200 7/8 LDF 5-
50A LMR 900 5/8 LDF 4.5-
50A LDF 4-
50A LMR 600 2.350 0.994 N/A N/A N/A 1.22 24 1.980 1.11 1.24 1.27 1.3 0.82 20 1.670 1.5 1.7 1.71 1.8 0.74 13.5 1.550 1.42 1.5 1.53 1.57 0.63 15 1.200 1.99 2.2 2.26 2.3 0.45 6.5 1.090 1.82 2.02 2.07 2.12 0.33 10 0.870 2.64 2.9 3 3.1 0.27 3 0.865 2.27 2.52 2.58 2.64 0.15 8 0.630 3.25 3.63 3.70 3.78 0.15 5 0.590 3.9 4.3 4.42 4.5 0.13 1.5 Frequency/Size 2000 MHz 2400 MHz 2500 MHz 2600 MHz Weight lbs/ft Bend Radius inches Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 45 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Cable Preparation The cable run is determined during the site survey. Note that the length of the cables may need to be slightly different, depending on the position of the buss bar relative to the BTS. Cut nine (9) pieces of cable for the main feeder cables to connect the nine RFS connectors to the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar. Leave enough extra length for the service loop below the RFS and for connection to the surge protectors. Cut eight (8) pieces of cable for the jumper cables to connect the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar to the eight (8) RF input connectors on the back of the BTS. Leave enough extra cable length for service. Cut one (1) piece of cable for the jumper cable to connect the surge protector on the system ground buss bar to the CAL connector on the back of the BTS. Leave enough extra cable length for service. Cut a piece of LMR 400 cable to connect each of the GPS antennas to the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar. Leave enough extra cable length for service. The maximum length of the LMR 400 cable for the GPS antenna is 100 feet. Cut a piece of LMR 400 cable to connect the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar to each GPS connector on the back of the BTS. Leave enough extra cable length for service. If there is more than one BTS co-located in the installation, two GPS antennas can serve all BTSs in the installation. The cable from the GPS antenna (after it goes through the surge protector) is connected to the antenna input of the GPS distribution amplifier (Figure 12). The output ports of the GPS distribution amplifier are connected to the GPS inputs of the BTS. The GPS distribution amplifier is powered by the GPS antenna input. The drawing in Figure 13 depicts the placement of the shared GPS resources among three BTSs. Figure 12: GPS Distribution Amplifier 46 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide BTS 1 BTS 2 BTS 3 GPS 2 GPS 1 SHELTER Polyphaser Polyphaser Distribution Amp Distribution Amp Figure 13: Depiction of GPS Distribution Amplifier Install Connectors on Cables Install connectors on both ends of each cable. For LMR 600 cables, install EZ-600 N-type male connectors. For LMR 400 cables, install EZ-400 N-type male connectors. Steps for installing both types of connectors can be found in Appendix K. For reference, Appendix L also provides a list of vendors who can make cables. Sweep Individual Cables Sweep each individual cable, the RFS (8) and CAL main feeder and jumper cables, to check for line loss. Follow the instructions for sweeping the cables provided in Appendix C, entering the results in the RFS System Test Form. Check continuity of the data/power cable. When finished, cover the cable connectors for protection until they are connected to the RFS or GPS. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 47 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. CAL CAL RFS 5 - 8 RFS 5 - 8 RFS 1 - 4 RFS 1 - 4 Connectorize & Run Cables Connect all of the RF cables to the surge protectors in the system ground buss bar. An example of a buss bar connection is shown in Figure 14. Ensure that the proper cable is connected to the proper surge protector. Connect the power/data cable to its surge protector. Also connect all the jumper cables to the surge protectors that will attach to the BTS. Do not connect these cables to the BTS at this time. Torque all the cable connectors to the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar to 20-24 inch-pounds. Figure 14: Buss Bar Connections Route all of the cables RFS (8), CAL, DATA/POWER and GPS (1 or 2) - between the system ground buss bar and the RFS, and GPS mounting sites. If running the cables up a tower, use a hoisting grip to lift the cables (Figures 15 and 16). GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 1 GPS 2 48 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Calibration Cable Calibration Cable Figure 15 : Omni Cable Routing Figure 16: Panel Cable Routing RF Cables RF Cables Data/Power Cable Data/Power Cable RF Cables RF Cables Data/Power Data/Power Cable Cable Calibration Cable Calibration Cable Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 49 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Install the BTS Install Mounting Rack or Enclosure The BTS mounting rack (Figure 17) or enclosure is to be installed in compliance with applicable portions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), articles 800 and 810. You will need to adhere to local installation standards, as well as Navini Networks standards and procedures. Refer to Appendix J for guidelines on outdoor BTS enclosures. Figure 17: BTS Mounting Rack 50 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003
| 1 | User Manual Section 2 | Users Manual | 3.00 MiB |
Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Install the BTS Install Mounting Rack or Enclosure The BTS mounting rack (Figure 17) or enclosure is to be installed in compliance with applicable portions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), articles 800 and 810. You will need to adhere to local installation standards, as well as Navini Networks standards and procedures. Refer to Appendix J for guidelines on outdoor BTS enclosures. Figure 17: BTS Mounting Rack 50 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Split Chassis Split Chassis Combo Chassis Combo Chassis Install Chassis The BTS chassis may be one of two types: Combo Chassis or Split Chassis. Prior to Ripwave Release 1.19, only the Combo Chassis was used (Figure 18). The advantage of the Split Chassis has to do with improved RF power output (Figure 19). The Split Chassis is available for the 2.3, 2.5, and 2.6 GHz systems; it is not available for the 2.4 GHz system. Install the BTS chassis in the mounting rack using ten (10) screws. Figure 18: BTS Chassis Panel separates Panel separates RF and Digital RF and Digital shelves shelves Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 51 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. B T S B T S Inner Loop Fans Inner Loop Fans Power @ 1000 Watts Power @ 1000 Watts 50 Amp 50 Amp B T S B T S Digital Shelf Digital Shelf Inner Loop Fans Inner Loop Fans Power @ 400 Watts Power @ 400 Watts 20 Amp 20 Amp RF Shelf RF Shelf Inner Loop Fans Inner Loop Fans Power @ 1100 Watts Power @ 1100 Watts 50 Amp 50 Amp Split Chassis (MMDS/WCS) Split Chassis (MMDS/WCS) Combo Chassis (ISM) Combo Chassis (ISM) 27V 27V Circuit Circuit Breaker Breaker B B U B B U B B U B B U Battery Battery 200 AH 200 AH AC/DC AC/DC Converter Converter AC INPUT:
AC INPUT:
180-265 VAC 180-265 VAC OR 115VAC OR 115VAC Figure 19: Split Vs. Combo Chassis Power AC INPUT:
AC INPUT:
180-265 VAC 180-265 VAC OR 115VAC OR 115VAC AC/DC AC/DC Converter Converter Battery Battery 200 AH 200 AH Circuit Circuit Breaker Breaker 27V 27V 52 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Connect Input Power Next, connect the power supply to the BTS card cage (Figure 20). The gauge of the wire is determined by the length of the run and by NEC standards. Use a 60-amp circuit breaker when running the line. Terminate both of the input power wires and the ground wire with a - inch terminal lug. Assuming a +24 VDC power supply, connect the +24 VDC input power connections and the +24 VDC return wires to the BTS card cage. WARNING! Ensure that the power is off before connecting the input power wires to the BTS input terminals. BTS +24 VDC Input Terminals BTS +24 VDC Input Terminals If the input power is 120 VAC, plug the two power supply input cables into 120 VAC outlets, and turn on the circuit breaker on the power supply. If the input power is 24 VDC, check for +24 VDC across the input terminals of the BTS card cage. If +24 VDC is not present across the input terminals, check all input power wiring for proper connections. Also, check the power supply for proper operation and the fuses for continuity. When finished, turn off the power supply. Figure 20: Split Chassis Power Connections Ground Lug Ground Lug Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 53 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Connect BTS to Ground Connections All connections need to be checked before power is applied to the system. At a minimum, perform the following:
Ensure continuity across all ground connections. Ensure an open connection from the power supply output (positive input to the BTS card cage) to frame ground. Connect Chassis Alarms The chassis contains two connectors that are used to send alarm indications to the BTS when the BTS is housed in an outdoor enclosure. One of the connectors, labeled CABINET ALARM, is used to trigger alarm conditions that occur within the external chassis. The second connector, labeled BBU, is used to process alarms from a battery backup unit. Refer to Appendix L for instructions on connecting the alarms. 54 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Install GPS Antennas As mentioned earlier, there are two models of GPS antennas that can be used with the Ripwave Base Station, as shown in Figures 21 and 22: Motorola Timing 2000 and VIC 100. The system will use either one or two GPS antenna modules. Figure 21: Motorola Timing 2000 GPS Figure 22: VIC 100 GPS The mounting location for the GPS antenna is determined during the site survey. When installing, ensure that the following requirements are met:
The GPS antenna is installed within 100 feet of the BTS. The GPS antenna is located to provide the widest view of the sky (objects such as buildings or trees can interfere with signals from the satellite). Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 55 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Motorola Timing 2000 For the Motorola Timing 2000, mount each GPS antenna module using the mounting bracket hardware (Figures 23 and 24). Connect the GPS cable(s) to the GPS antenna module(s). Torque the connector(s) to 20-24 inch-pounds. Figure 23: Motorola GPS Antenna Mounting Brackets Figure 24: Motorola GPS Antenna Mounted to a Pole 56 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Captive Captive Mounting Mounting Hardware Hardware VIC 100 For the VIC 100, mount each GPS antenna module, run the cable through the pipe clamp mount
(Figure 25). Connect the cable to the GPS antenna, then weatherize the connection (Figure 26). Secure the antenna module to the pipe clamp mount using the captive mounting hardware. Install the GPS antenna module and the pipe clamp mount to the mounting pipe and tighten the two mounting screws (Figure 27). Figure 25: VIC 100 Pipe Clamp Mount Figure 26: VIC 100 GPS Antenna Figure 27: Assembled VIC 100 Antenna & Mount GPS antenna GPS antenna mounting screws mounting screws Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 57 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Install the RFS Now that the BTS is in place, the RFS is readied for installation. Follow either the Panel Antenna or Omni Antenna information and procedures below. Reference the drawings in Appendix M. Panel Antenna The RFS Panel antenna is installed on a structure, such as a tower or a pole, which is defined in the site survey and design. Following are the steps to complete the installation of the panel antenna. Verify RFS Operation Verify proper operation of the RFS before installation. Test the transmit and receive path of each antenna in the RFS per Appendix C, the RFS System Test. Set the Downtilt Check the engineering study for the required downtilt of the antenna. Normally, it will be 2 degrees for omni and 6 degrees for panel downtilt. Each notch in the mounting bracket is equal to 1 degree of downtilt (Figure 28). Set the upper mounting bracket to achieve the required downtilt. Be sure to include in the setting any electrical uptilt or downtilt built into the antenna. Figure 28: RFS Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket 58 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide The following steps are critical !
The following steps are critical !
Set the Azimuth Position the RFS on the mounting pole or structure, ensuring that the antenna is pointing in the proper azimuth direction determined by the engineering study. For an omni, the first antenna element must face East (Figure 29). Figure 29: Omni Antenna Elements The azimuth direction is stated in degrees from true north. Use the diagram shown in Figure 30 to determine the declination angle for your location. Add or subtract the declination angle from magnetic north to obtain true north. Tighten the four nuts on each of the two antenna mounting brackets to secure the RFS to the mounting pole. Use a compass to check the direction from the center of the panel (this is magnetic north). Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 59 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure 30: Declination Angle Verify the Downtilt Using an inclinometer, check the downtilt of the RFS antenna. If required, adjust the angle using the downtilt adjustment brackets. Be sure to include any electrical uptilt or downtilt built into the antenna in the setting. Tighten the mounting hardware to secure the RFS in the proper position. Recheck the downtilt angle again to verify proper position. Repeat the procedure for all other antennas that are installed in the system. Ensure that they are mounted in the proper direction and with the correct downtilt angle. 60 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Install Surge Protectors The RFS has ten cable connectors on the bottom of the unit. Eight are antenna connections, with the connectors alternately numbered from right to left as shown in Figure 31. The two connectors in the middle are for antenna calibration and data/DC power connections. Install surge protectors on nine (9) of the RFS connectors the eight antenna connectors and the calibration connector. The surge protectors must be installed directly to the RFS to provide protection for the antenna elements. Torque the surge protectors to 20-24 inch-pounds. Figure 31: Surge Protectors Surge Surge Protectors Protectors Install Cables Between the RFS & BTS Connect all of the cables the eight antenna cables, the calibration cable and the data/power cable to the surge protectors on the RFS (Figure 32). For ease of installation, install the cables from the inside out. Ensure that the proper cable is connected to the proper antenna (Figure 33). Torque the RF cable connectors to 20-24 inch-pounds. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 61 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 6 6 2 2 5 5 1 1 Calibration Calibration Cable Cable Data/Power Data/Power Cable Cable Surge Surge Protectors Protectors RF Cables RF Cables RF Cable RF Cable Connectors Connectors Figure 32: RFS Connectors 62 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure 33: Completed Cable Installation 8 8 4 4 7 7 3 3 6 6 2 2 5 5 1 1 Data/Power Cable Data/Power Cable Calibration Cable Calibration Cable Install Grounding Kit on Cables Install grounding kit wire connections on the eight (8) RFS cables and the one (1) CAL cable per the instruction sheet that comes with the grounding kit. Install the grounding wire in a position on the cable so that it can be attached to the ground buss bar that is mounted close to the RFS. More than one ground buss bar may be installed in the system, depending on the length of the cable run. Connect Ground Wires to the Ground Buss Bar Connect the ground wires on the cables to the ground buss bar using the hardware supplied with the grounding kit. Connect the ground stud on the RFS to the ground buss bar. Use a -inch terminal lug to connect the ground wire to the ground stud on the RFS. Connect the ground buss bar to earth ground. An example is shown in Figure 34. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 63 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Earth Ground Earth Ground Ground Wires Ground Wires Ground Buss Bar Ground Buss Bar Figure 34: RFS Grounding Test the RFS & Cables Test the RFS and the eight (8) cables per Appendix C, the RFS System Test. Record the results in the form. For this test, use the cable connectors that will be attached to the BTS. Include the jumpers and all surge protectors. Weatherize the RFS Cable Connectors Weatherize all ground wire connections exposed to weather using electrical tape and butyl mastic tape. Follow the instructions supplied with the weatherproofing kit. Examples are shown in Figure 35. Figure 35: Weatherized Cables Weatherproofing Weatherproofing on RFS connectors on RFS connectors Weatherproofing Weatherproofing on ground wires on ground wires 64 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide BTS BTS Connect RF Cables & Alarms to BTS Connect all of the cables to the BTS. The connection points are shown in Figures 36, 37, and 38. Torque the cable connectors to 20-24 inch-pounds. If applicable, connect the cabinet alarm connector and Battery Backup connector (Cabinet Alarm and BBU) to the back of the chassis. More information on connecting alarms, rectifiers, and battery backup equipment are provided in Appendix L and Appendix N, respectively. Figure 36: Combo Chassis Rear View Battery Backup Battery Backup Cabinet Alarm Cabinet Alarm Data/Power Data/Power RF cables RF cables GPS 1 GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 2 CAL CAL Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 65 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure 37: Split Chassis RF/PA Shelf Rear View Figure 38: Split Chassis Digital Shelf Rear View Cable Connector Cable Connector Data/Power Data/Power Power Power Cal Cable Cal Cable Connectors ON/OFF Connectors ON/OFF Battery Backup Connector Battery Backup Connector Cabinet Alarms Connector Cabinet Alarms Connector GPS 1 GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 2 66 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Omni Antenna The RFS Omni antenna is installed on a structure, such as a tower or a pole, which is defined in the site survey and design. Following are the steps to complete the installation of the panel antenna. Assemble the Antenna Mount per the instructions that come with it (Figure 39). Use a compass to determine which direction is true East (incorporating declination angle - see Figure 30). Figure 39: Omni Antenna Mount Position the Antenna Mount in a direction to provide accessibility to the RFS after it is installed. Position and install the Antenna Mount on the mounting structure so that any one of the eight mounting hole pins is facing East. Tighten the Antenna Mount hardware to secure it to the structure (Figure 40). Figure 40: Secured Omni Antenna Mount Mounting Hole Pin Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 67 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Ground stud Sweep the RFS antenna inputs for db loss. Record all results for later calculations. Position the RFS on the Antenna Mount, ensuring that the arrow on the bottom of the Antenna Mount faces true East. Secure the RFS antenna to the Antenna Mount (Figure 41). Install surge protectors on the 8 antenna and 1 cal connectors. Figure 41: Omni Ground Stud Connect the eight antenna cables, cal cable, and Data/Power cable to the RFS antenna. Attach the ground wire to the ground stud. Install grounding kits from RF cables to buss bars. Sweep the antenna and cables from the RF cable connectors that attach to the BTS. Record all measurements. Weatherize all connections (Figure 42). Figure 42: Weatherized Connectors 68 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Verify Installed Circuit Cards WARNING! Ensure that power to the BTS chassis is off before installing the circuit cards or any of the RF Power Amplifiers in the chassis. The circuit cards, including the RF/PA cards, normally come seated in the BTS chassis. If they are already installed, verify that the correct cards are placed and seated properly. The RF/PA modules may be installed in any position on the top (RF) shelf. For the Digital shelf, refer to Figure 36 for correct card placement. Table 9 describes the name of each type of card in the Digital shelf. Tighten the screws to secure the RF/PAs into the RF shelf. For the circuit cards, follow the markings on the backplane for the position of each card in the Digital shelf. Make sure the ejectors on all cards are engaged in the chassis. Figure 43 represents a fully populated Digital shelf. If the BTS is not fully populated, blank panels are installed to fill in the empty card space. They are also used to fill in the empty space between the circuit cards and the end of the cabinet. Figure 43: Digital Shelf Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 69 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Table 9: Digital Card Names Abbreviation SYN IF CHP MDM CC Card Name Synthesizer Intermediate Frequency Channel Processor Modem Communications Controller Number of Cards 1 or 2 Always 2 Always 2 Always 2 1 or 2 Base Station Installation Certification When the installation of the equipment is complete, the Base Station Installation Certification form needs to be completed and signed off by both the installer and the customer. A copy of this form may be found in Appendix D. 70 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3: Commissioning This chapter provides post-installation instructions on provisioning, configuring, calibrating, testing, and commissioning the Ripwave Base Station. Review Customer Network Plans As part of preparing to put the BTS into commission, it is important to review the actual installed site against the customer Network Architecture Plan - i.e., checking that all equipment and software are installed and available for use. Verify that all routers are installed and IP addresses are correct. Finally, make sure the installation is approved and signed off by all responsible parties. Install EMS Server The EMS is the management interface for all elements in the Ripwave system. The EMS Server has to be installed on a computer that is connected directly to the Base Station (called the Test EMS) or through the system backhaul (customer EMS). For testing purposes, the Test EMS Server is connected through an Ethernet hub or switch to the Ethernet port found on the front of the BTS (Figure 44). Note that the EMS Server does not support more than one Network Interface Card (NIC). The other port on the front of the CC card is a Serial (Universal Data) Port, also known as the Console Port. Using a laptop/portable computer connected through the data port, an on-site technician can communicate directly with the BTS using a terminal emulation software package. However, this is not recommended. It is always best to rely on the EMS interface for BTS information. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 71 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure 44: Ports on CC Card If the customers EMS is installed and can be accessed through the backhaul, it can be connected via T1 or Ethernet to the BTS and used for testing purposes. The EMS software installation procedures can be found in the EMS Software Installation Guide, P/N 40-00017-00. After the EMS Server and Client applications are installed, the EMS database needs to be configured with the settings that are designated for the Base Station. The settings are found in the Network Architecture Plan provided by the customer. Verify Cable Connections Before proceeding, verify that all power is connected and present. Ensure that all T1 or Ethernet connections are installed correctly and are active. Verify that the BTS and the RFS are properly installed and that all cables are connected. Ethernet Connector Ethernet Connector Ethernet Connector Ethernet Connector Serial Port Connector Serial Port Connector Serial Port Connector Serial Port Connector
(aka, Console Port)
(aka, Console Port) T1 Connectors T1 Connectors 72 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Configure & Power Up the BTS Overview During initial power up a minimal set of configuration parameters have to be input to the BTS through the serial port on the CC card. These early configuration parameters are referred to as the boot parameters. They are required to get the BTS to communicate with the EMS Server so that all the configuration data can be downloaded from EMS to the BTS. The PC used at this point is a Test EMS Server (i.e., laptop). If the customers actual EMS Server is available, a separate Test EMS (i.e., laptop) may not be necessary. For simplification, whether it is a Test EMS laptop or the customers EMS Server, we refer to the device at this stage as the Test EMS. Set Up the Test EMS Typically, in order to keep a constant link an Ethernet hub (10/100 Base-T) connects the Test EMS to the BTS via a male to female RS-232 cable connected to the CC serial port. A connection between the serial port on the CC and the serial port on the Test EMS is also used. Standard communication software, i.e., a standard terminal emulation program, such as Windows HyperTerm or TeraTerm, is used during these early configuration stages. Step 1. Verify all RF cables going to the BTS are securely connected to the proper connector. Step 2. Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector located on the CC card and to an Ethernet hub. Connect another Ethernet cable from the Ethernet hub to the Ethernet connector on the PC containing the Test EMS Server and Client applications. Step 3. Connect an RS-232 cable (DB-9 male to female) to the serial port (UART) located on the CC card to the serial port connector on the Test EMS computer. Note: A VT 100 terminal or any standard Windows based ASCII terminal emulation program can be used for connecting to the serial port. The connection for HyperTerminal is explained here. The steps to get to the HyperTerminal program may be different due to variances in the Operating Systems and in the setup of the PC. Step 4. Power on the Test EMS Server. Step 5. On the desktop, go to Start > Programs > Accessories > HyperTerminal >
HyperTerminal (using whichever terminal emulation program you are running). In the COM1 Properties window (Figure 45), under the Port Settings tab, enter the following configuration options. Click OK. Step 6. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 73 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure 45: COM1 Properties Bits per second:
Bits per second:
9600 9600 Data Bits:
Data Bits:
Parity:
Parity:
Stop Bits:
Stop Bits:
8 8 None None 1 1 Flow Control:
Flow Control:
None None Step 7. On the Test EMS Server, click on the Server icon to start the EMS Server. NOTE: This step assumes you have loaded and configured the EMS Server & Client applications. Step 8. Click on the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) icon to start the EMS Client GUI. Step 9. At the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager login screen, enter the user name and password. The defaults are both emsAdmin. Add BTS in EMS Once you have the CAM application running on the Test EMS server, you will need to click on the BTS element tab to add the new BTS. Only the minimal configuration parameters have to be completed at this time - i.e., BTS name, ID, IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. Follow the Network Architecture Plan designed for this system. Also configure the GPS offset time. The default is 0 minutes, indicating the BTS would be located in the same time zone as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Change this value to whatever time is appropriate to the location of the BTS in relation to GMT time zone. For example, if the BTS is located in Dallas, Texas, which is 6 hours behind GMT time zone, you would enter -360. As you will see in the section that follows, you will also configure the RFS splitter loss at this time. For more details about configuring a BTS, refer to the Ripwave Configuration Guide. 74 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Configure RFS (Splitter Loss Value) Each RFS shipped is pre-programmed for the customers specific operating environment. An RFS Configuration CD accompanies the RFS equipment when it is shipped. The CD includes an RFS script and a Quick Guide with procedures on selecting the appropriate splitter loss values to be entered into the EMS database for the given Base Station. Each Configuration disk is unique to the individual RFS that is shipped. You cannot use the same disk on other RFS equipment. RFS Configuration Procedure Step 1. Remove the RFS Configuration disk from the RFS packaging, and insert it in the floppy drive of the Test EMS. Step 2. Copy the folder named RFS that is on the disk to the Test EMS Server:
<ems install dir>/scripts. It will take approximately 20 seconds to complete. Step 3. Open the new folder on the EMS server. You will see a list of file names. The format of the file names is as follows:
RFS_serial number_frequency.cli Example: RFS_024300001_2402500.cli - This example of the configuration file is for an RFS with serial number 024300001 and a center frequency of 2.4025. Verify the correct serial number in the file name against the serial number of the RFS equipment. The equipment serial number may be found on the back of the RFS panel or on the side of the bottom cylinder of the omni antenna. Step 4. Determine which file you need to run, depending on the provisioned frequency of your BTS. NOTE: For 2.6 GHz systems, select the frequency that is closest to your provisioned center frequency. To find the provisioned center frequency for your BTS, open the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) application. Select the BTS tab and specific BTS, then Air Interface / Layer 2 / Carrier Data / Show Configuration. This will display the center frequency information. Step 5. Open the selected CLI file for editing using any text processing application program. Note the power splitter values listed there (i.e., write them down or print them out). Step 6. Modify the line that starts with bts by changing the BTS ID for your BTS. The default is BTS 1. For example, if the ID for your BTS is 252, change the 1 to 252. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 75 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 7. Save this file as text, and then close it. Step 8. Start the EMS Config CLI application to run script <CLI script>. Do this by entering the following:
>enable <user name> <password>
>configure
>script scripts/rfs/rfs_<serial number>_<7-digit frequency>.cli NOTE: For Unix operating systems, the CLI text is case sensitive and the slash marks should be backward slashes instead of forward slashes. Step 9. View the Power Splitter values in EMS to verify that the CLI script ran as expected. The Power Splitter values may be found under Layer 1 / Show Configuration >
Antenna Table. You will need to Refresh the active screen to view the updated information. Step 10. Type Exit twice to exit the Config CLI edit mode. Power Up BTS Now you are ready to power up the BTS. Step 1. Ensure that input power has been connected to the BTS. Step 2. Switch the Power to ON. If the BTS is a Combo Chassis, the switch is located on the top right front of the BTS. The green Power On light next to the switch will illuminate
(Figure 46). If the BTS is a Split Chassis, the Power ON switch is located on the back lower middle of the Digital shelf. The green LEDs on the RF/PA modules and the circuit cards in the BTS chassis should illuminate. 76 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Power Power ON/OFF ON/OFF Combo Chassis Combo Chassis Figure 46: BTS Power On Switches Step 3. Watch for the auto-boot countdown command. Type in config on the computer keyboard to interrupt the standard boot sequence. The window of time to type in config after auto-boot starts is 20 seconds. Split Chassis Split Chassis Off/On switch Off/On switch BTS Bootup The BTS is shipped with a default value of a 20-second countdown to interrupt the standard bootup sequence. You can escape the standard bootup when the display shows the following:
autoboot countdown : quick [quick|delayed]
To escape the initialization sequence, type in config before the 20-second counter reaches zero. Note: Under the next section, Boot Prompt, you will see how to disable the 20-second countdown in lieu of a shorter, 1-second countdown. This will minimize downtime during unattended restart conditions, for example, if there is a power outage and the BTS is recovering. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 77 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Boot Prompt After you have escaped from the automated boot sequence, the console will display a rudimentary Boot prompt:
[Navini Boot]:
This prompt offers the ability to perform a small set of operations. Enter ? or h followed by the Enter key to display a list of commands (Exhibit 1). To invoke any of the commands, simply enter the single letter command with optional parameters, followed by the Enter key. Exhibit 1: Boot Commands
[Navini Boot]: ?
- fill memory
- copy memory print this list resume boot sequence print boot params change boot params display memory modify memory
p
c
d adrs[,n]
m adrs
f adrs, nbytes, value
t adrs, adrs, nbytes
@ Use this command once all parameters have been set as desired. This will resume the boot initialization sequence that you escaped from previously. p This command displays a concise representation of the current parameters used for boot configuration. c Use this command to alter the current boot parameters. Once selected, a detailed sequence of options is prompted, and is covered in detail later. After all of the items in this list are completed, you return to the [Navini Boot]: prompt. This option sequence allows you either to accept the current value by pressing the Enter key or to enter a new value from the range or values listed, followed by the Enter key. Additionally, you can enter . followed by the Enter key to erase the current value of an item and return it to a default state. If you make an error, you can choose -
(hyphen) followed by the Enter key to return to the previous item in the list. Alternatively, you can fix an error by proceeding with the selections and select change' when you return to the
[Navini Boot]: prompt. d Display memory allows you to display portions of the BTSs memory with user-defined values. It should only be performed with the assistance of a certified Navini service technician. m Modify memory allows you to alter portions of the BTSs memory with user defined values. It should only be performed with the assistance of a certified Navini service technician. 78 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide f Fill memory allows you to alter portions of the BTSs memory with a fixed pattern. It should only be performed with the assistance of a certified Navini service technician. t Fill memory allows you to alter portions of the BTSs memory with a pattern from another area of memory. It should only be performed with the assistance of a certified Navini service technician. Ethernet Configuration The Ethernet configuration is grouped into three sections: general, EMS, and traffic path. An example of the Ethernet configuration parameters is shown in Exhibit 2. Exhibit 2: Ethernet Configuration
[Navini Boot]: p date and time
: autoboot countdown ems inet snmp community
: traffic path mac address
: 172.16.23.181 ip on enet (active) ip on enet (standby) : 172.16.23.182 255.255.0.0 netmask on enet ip on backplane 10.0.0.1 172.16.0.100 gateway on enet General The general section offers you the ability to change the date and time manually. If a GPS has been installed, the BTS will automatically set the date and time:
01/09/2003[10:19] MM/dd/yyyy[hh:mm] delayed [quick|delayed] 172.16.0.10 public enet [enet|atm] 00:04:6a:00:01:20
: date and time : 08/21/2002[13:21] MM/dd/yyyy[hh:mm]
When this line is displayed, the current date (08/21/2002) and time [13:21] are displayed. Accept the defaults by pressing the Enter key, or enter date at the console and a new value using the format indicated in military time (Hours 1-24). All 5 fields must be entered as specified. Leading zeroes can be omitted. Previously, it was mentioned that the 20-second auto-boot countdown timer can be disabled and a 1 second countdown can be used instead. To enable this feature, change the autoboot countdown item from delayed (which is 20 seconds) to quick, which is 1 second:
autoboot countdown : delayed [quick|delayed]
Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 79
Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. EMS This section concerns the configuration of the EMS Server itself. First, the Internet (inet) IP address of the Server is specified. Make sure to fill this field with the address of the Server used to configure this BTS. Your BTS is shipped with this field un-initialized. You must provide a valid 4-digit IP address before you can proceed. For example:
ems inet : 172.16.0.10 The second parameter that you must specify to allow the EMS Server to recognize this BTS is a community string for the EMSs Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) interface. The default community string shipped with the BTS is public. Press the Enter key to accept this default, or type in a new value and press the Enter key to alter it:
snmp community : public Traffic Path The last major block of configurations required for an Ethernet backhaul to the BTS is the traffic path parameters. The first prompt instructs the BTS to use the Ethernet as the WAN (backhaul) configuration. It must be set to enet for an Ethernet backhaul. If atm is selected, proceed with the description in the ATM or IMA sections. The BTS is pre-
configured to use Ethernet for the WAN connection. Press the Enter key to accept this default:
traffic path : enet [enet|atm]
The BTS address is specified next. Every BTS must be uniquely addressed and have values that equate in the EMS configurations. This address information defines the Layer 2 parameters first, and then it defines the Layer 3 parameters. For Layer 2, you are only given an opportunity to see the Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC) address used by this BTS. This is a unique number programmed in the BTS. You cannot alter it. However, situations may develop in which you need to know the MAC address and, therefore, need to display the information. For example:
mac address : 00:04:6a:00:01:20 Next are the IP addresses that represent this BTS: one for the active CC card and one for the standby CC card. The active Controller card is always addressed using an odd-numbered IP address, i.e., 172.16.23.181. The standby Controller card uses the corresponding even-numbered IP address one digit higher, i.e., 172.16.23.182. ip on enet (active) : 172.16.23.181 ip on enet (standby) : 172.16.23.182 80 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide For this reason, the BTS only allows you to enter odd addresses in the range XXX.XXX.XXX.1 to XXX.XXX.XXX.253 in this field. The standby field is only displayed for your convenience and cannot be altered. Note that the BTS automatically handles switching the address when a failure occurs on an active Controller card, requiring the standby Controller to go into service. However, the MAC addresses remain fixed. Coupled with any IP configuration is a need to specify the corresponding subnet mask. Refer to common network administration literature for guides on addresses, networks, masks, and gateways. In short, the subnet mask identifies the portion of the IP address that is common to those devices connected to the same Ethernet. The most important other device is the BTSs default gateway (specified later). The portion is identified using a logical and of the mask with the address. For example, a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0. and with an IP address of 172.16.23.182 yields a network of 172.16.x.x. In this case, the default gateway must also be on the 172.16.x.x network. The BTS requires that this association be met. If not, you will be asked to try again. netmask on enet : 255.255.0.0 The BTS uses a high-speed Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) connection to communicate with the redundant T1/Controller Card. This interface is only used internally and has a fixed subnet mask of 255.255.255.252. The host portion of the address - that is the least significant 2 bits - is automatically provided by the software based upon slot ID. However, you may want to alter the default network address to avoid conflict with your network. The BTS is shipped with the 10.0.0.0 network as the internal network. This is a reserved network not used on the Internet. However, if your private network utilizes this private address space, you may need to change it to avoid the conflict. ip on backplane : 10.0.0.1 As for the default gateway for the BTS, all traffic routed outside the directly connected Ethernet port goes through the gateway. Furthermore, the gateway must be reachable on the directly connected Ethernet port. Therefore, the BTS will prevent you from entering a default gateway address that fails the logical and test discussed previously. This address is specified on the line item shown below:
gateway on enet : 172.16.0.100 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 81 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc.
: 01/09/2003[10:22] delayed 172.16.0.10 public atm 00:04:6a:00:01:20 ATM/T1 Configuration For an ATM/T1 configuration, the items shown in Exhibit 3 are identical to Ethernet with the exception of the traffic path, which must show atm for this type of configuration. Exhibit 3: ATM/T1 Configuration date and time
: autoboot countdown ems inet snmp community
: traffic path mac address
: ip on atm (active)
: 172.16.23.181 ip on atm (standby) : 172.16.23.182 255.255.0.0 netmask on atm When ATM is selected for the WAN interface using the traffic mode parameter, an additional set of parameters is required (Exhibit 6). First of all, another IP address must be identified for the ATM interface. The ATM IP address cannot be the same as the Ethernet IP address. In this case, the Ethernet IP address is only used for debug purposes and is a non-routed interface. This means that the BTS can only reach other computers directly connected to the Ethernet port of the BTS. The only routed interface available is through the ATM port. This routed interface address is specified with the ip on atm line item and the corresponding netmask parameter (Exhibit 4). The information on network address specifications from the Ethernet Configuration section of this chapter applies to ATM as well. For ATM, the only gateway allowed for the BTS is on the ATM interface, as specified here. Exhibit 4: Additional ATM Parameters ip on atm (active) ip on atm (standby)
: netmask on atm ip on backplane
: gateway on atm
: For an ATM system, the BTS must have some additional configuration for the Management Private Virtual Channel (Management PVC). Recall the boot parameter philosophy discussed before. The boot parameters only identify those settings required to allow the BTS to reach the EMS. Note that the boot parameters only allow specification for one PVC (the Management PVC), which is used to reach the EMS. All user traffic PVC parameters are specified in the EMS configuration. Ensure that the EMS parameters for the Management PVC match those being set here through the boot prompt. If not, as soon as connection is made with the EMS, the Management PVC will be reconfigured and can potentially disconnect the BTS from the network. 255.255.0.0 10.0.0.1 172.17.0.100
: 172.17.0.102 172.17.0.101
: 82 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide The PVC configuration is broken into 3 sections: ATM layer parameters; optional Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) parameters, and T1 physical layer parameters. The first item selects which ATM interface will be used for the Management PVC. If IMA is not selected, you may select from one of the 8 T1 ports numbered 1-8 using the option t1-N, where N is the port number. This is the same interface port number specified in the EMS. If IMA is desired, reference the following section:
pvc type-atm i/f : t1-0 [t1-(1-8)|ima-(1-2)]
The circuit identifier for this segment of the Management PVC is the next item specified. The first parameter identifies the maximum number of bits for any PVCs identifier Virtual Path Identifier/ Virtual Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) pair. The BTS restricts the available set to 13 total bits. However, you are free to divide those 13 bits between the VPI and VCI as needed, with the VPI having a maximum allocation of 8 bits. You can choose the number of bits for each by selecting two values separated by a :. Or you may select the BTS default of 3 VPI bits and 10 VCI bits by pressing the Enter key:
pvc id size vpi:vci : 3:10 [1-8:1-13]
Having specified the number of significant VPI and VCI bits, now select the actual identifier. The BTS will restrict the values entered for the VPI and VCI to the ranges you selected in the previous size specification. For instance, if 3:10 is selected as a size allocation, the VPI must be between 0 and 7. Again, you can select the values for the VPI and VCI separated by a : or accept the default value of VPI = 1 and VCI = 100 by pressing the Enter key. Be careful not to use the reserved VCI values from 0-15 that are often used in ATM networks for Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) purposes. pvc vpi:vci : 1:100 [0-255:16-8192]
The service category for the Management PVC is specified next. The choices are Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) or Constant Bit Rate (CBR). Other ATM service categories are available for traffic PVCs, but those are specified in the EMS configuration. UBR and CBR both require a set data rate and delay variation parameter. The data rate is specified in cells per second in the ATM Traffic Contracts Peak Cell Rate (PCR) field. The delay variation is in the ATM Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) in the ATCs CDVT field. Specify the PCR and the CDVT values separated by a : or chose the default by pressing the Enter key. pvc service category : ubr [cbr|ubr]
pvc atc pcr:cdvt : 3641:100 [1-3641:0-100]
Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 83 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. The final set of values is used to configure the T1 parameters. The line type allows you to select Extended Super-Frame (ESF) or D4. ESF format is the standard format for ATM/T1 applications. D4 format is supported as an alternate; however, T1 signaling capabilities may be limited. Check your network plans for a definition for your specific application. line type : esf [esf|d4]
Additionally, you must choose a line coding type:
line coding : b8zs [b8zs|ami]
The approximate length of the T1 line is specified next. It is used to control the signal conditioning used on the T1:
line length (ft) : 500 Finally, the T1s timing source must be specified. A T1 uses only one timing source either at the near-end or far-end of the line. You may select the BTS as the originator of the timing source by selecting local, or you may select the far-end as the timing reference by selecting loop. line clock source : loop [loop|local]
: 08/21/2001[10:22] 172.16.0.10 public atm 00:04:6a:00:01:20 IMA Configuration If you decide to utilize IMA groups to pool the T1 resources, then the same parameters described for the ATM/T1 Configuration above also apply to configuring IMAs. Refer to Exhibit 5. Exhibit 5: IMA Configuration date and time ems inet snmp community
: traffic path mac address
: ip on enet (active)
: 172.16.23.181 ip on enet (standby) : 172.16.23.182 255.255.0.0 netmask on enet
: ip on atm (active) 172.17.0.101 ip on atm (standby)
: netmask on atm
: ip on backplane gateway on atm
: In addition, the ATM interface must be specified as IMA and reference one of two IMA groups used for the Management PVC. This IMA group must match what is identified in the EMS. Use 0 for the first group and 1 for the second group. 255.255.0.0 10.0.0.1 172.17.0.100
: 172.17.0.102
: 84 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Each group identifies a set of T1 ports that are being combined to form one larger virtual port. For the sake of boot parameter specification, ALL T1 interfaces for the Management PVCs IMA group are assumed to be identical. So the parameters for T1 specifications apply to all T1s of the IMA group:
pvc type-atm i/f : ima-0 Once the IMA interface is selected, a set of IMA parameters must be specified for the IMA group used by the Management PVC. An IMA group inherently supports dynamic addition and drops of individual T1 facilities from the group to facilitate fault tolerance to failed T1 facilities. The minimum number of T1 ports, or links, that must exist for the IMA group to function is specified here. A value from 1-7 is required for each of the receive and transmit directions. Separate the values with :. You can increase the values from the default of 1 link in each direction or accept the default by pressing the Enter key. ima min rx:tx links : 1:1 [1-7:1-7]
Next, specify which T1 ports are used to form the IMA group. This is a list of T1 port identifiers
(1-8), each separated by commas. The BTS makes sure you enter at least as many links as you specified for the minimum requirements above:
selected ima links : 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 The near- and far-end IMA protocols use an ID number to identify each other. This value must agree with that provisioned at the far-end of the IMA link. The BTS defaults to a value of 0, but you can specify any value from 0 to 255:
ima group id : 0 [0-255]
Group symmetry modes allow symmetric or asymmetric operation of IMA links:
ima symmetry : sym [sym|asym|asym-cfg]
IMA frame length specifies the size of the IMA frames that are being transmitted:
ima frame length : 128 [32|64|128]
The IMA alpha/beta/gamma parameters are used by the IMA frame synchronization mechanism.:
ima alpha:beta:gamma : 2:2:1 [1-2:1-5:1-5]
The IMA clock mode selects either a common or independent IMA clock mode (Exhibit 6). It is the same as for ATM/T1. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 85 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc.
: 1:100
: 3:10 ctc [ctc|itc] 3641:100 esf b8zs 500 loop Exhibit 6: IMA Clock Mode ima clock mode
: pvc id size vpi:vci pvc vpi:vci
: pvc service category : ubr pvc atc pcr:cdvt line type
: line coding
: line length (ft) line clock source Standard Boot Sequence The first items in Exhibit 7 (Ethernet) and Exhibit 8 (ATM) illustrate the BOOTROM loading and launching of the core application. This is a fixed process that cannot be altered in the field. Auto-booting is the process that can be escaped by user intervention, (i.e., enter config), in order to enter the boot prompt. Without user intervention, the remaining sequence occurs automatically; hence, auto-boot. Exhibit 7: Standard Ethernet Boot Sequence - Example System Boot Copyright 2000-2001 Copyright 1984-1998
Navini Networks, Inc.
Wind River Systems, Inc. CPU: CC (PPC860P) Kernel Version: 5.4 BSP version: 1.0/110501 Creation date: Nov
5 2001, 13:09:12 Attaching to TFFS... done. Loading /tffs0/LOADS/BTSA/core...5249740 Starting at 0x10000... Auto-booting..............................Done Starting File System......................Done Mounting Drive /tffs0.....................Done Mounting Drive /dev0......................Done Mounting Drive /dev1......................Done Starting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done Starting ARP..............................Done Starting motfec I/f.......................Done Attaching sl(0) I/f.......................Done Attaching motfec(0) I/f...................Done Attaching lo(0) I/f.......................Done Mounting Remote Filesystem................Done Starting Telnet Daemon....................Done Starting Load Monitoring Tools............Done Loading Target Shell Symbols..............Done Starting WDB Tools........................Done Starting Target Shell.....................Done Initializing System Logger................Done Starting Application......................Done Starting LLC I/f..........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting Lpbk Proxy.......................Done 86 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Starting CDI..............................Done Starting CAM I/f..........................Done Starting MME..............................Done Starting EtherBridge......................Done Starting DHCP Relay Agent.................Done Starting Peer ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Host ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Mobile IP Proxy Agent............Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Selecting Config Data Source as EMS ......Done Loading LLC...............................Done Initializing NvRam Mib ...................Done Initializing SNMP Agent ..................Done Pinging EMS (172.28.79.30)................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading BAUX..............................Done Loading BMCB..............................Done Loading MACA..............................Done Loading MACB..............................Done Loading CHAD..............................Done Loading CHTT..............................Done Loading CDSW..............................Done Loading BDSC..............................Done Loading CHSL..............................Done Loading CHMA..............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Stopping LLC Proxy........................Done Evaluating bootload status................Done Initializing DSP(s).......................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Updating Slot Table.......................Done Requesting EMS for Configuration Data ....Done Configuring BTS from EMS .................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Configuring Diag Feature(s)...............Done
Z NNNN NNNNNN
(TM) ZZZ ZZZZZ NNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNN
NNNNNN NNNNNN
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZ NNNNNN NNNNNN
Z NNNNNN
ZZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN
ZZZ
NNNNNN
NNNNNN
NNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNN
NN
NNNNNN
ZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
NNNNNN
NNNNN
ZZZZZZ
NNN
ZZZZZZ
N
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ
N
N
NN
N N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N N
N
N
i
i aaa
v
v i n nn
i
a v
v i nn
n i aaaa v
v i n
n i
NN
N
a
a
v v
i n
n i aaaa
v
i n
n i
N E T W O R K S
(TM) Internet at the Speed of Thought (TM) NNNNNN
ZZZZZZ
Copyright (c) Navini Networks, Inc. NNNNNN
ZZZZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN
ZZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN NNNNN NNN
ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZ
N
Copyright (c) Conexant, Inc. Copyright (c) NComm, Inc. Copyright (c) RSA Data Security, Inc. Copyright (c) SNMP Research, Inc. Copyright (c) Texas Instruments, Inc.
2000-2001 Copyright (c) Wind River Systems, Inc. 1984-2000
1991-1992 2000-2002 2000-2001 1997-2001 1989-1999 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 87
Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. KERNEL : 5.4(WIND version 2.5) BSP
: 1.0/01.19.00.00 CPU: CC (PPC860P).
Processor #0. Memory Size: 0x3f80000. WDB: Ready. Last reset caused by a power on condition. Current time is FRI JUL 12 14:48:29 2002 bts-4 [Active]% Exhibit 8: Standard ATM Boot Sequence - Example System Boot Copyright 2000-2001 Copyright 1984-1998
Navini Networks, Inc.
Wind River Systems, Inc. CPU: CC (PPC860P) Kernel Version: 5.4 BSP version: 1.0/110501 Creation date: Nov
5 2001, 13:09:12 Attaching to TFFS... done. Loading /tffs0/LOADS/BTSB/core...5249740 Starting at 0x10000... Auto-booting..............................Done Starting File System......................Done Mounting Drive /tffs0.....................Done Mounting Drive /dev0......................Done Mounting Drive /dev1......................Done Starting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done Starting ARP..............................Done Starting motfec I/f.......................Done Starting wec I/f..........................Done Attaching wec(0) I/f......................Done Attaching sl(0) I/f.......................Done Attaching motfec(0) I/f...................Done Attaching lo(0) I/f.......................Done Mounting Remote Filesystem................Done Starting Telnet Daemon....................Done Starting Load Monitoring Tools............Done Loading Target Shell Symbols..............Done Starting WDB Tools........................Done Starting Target Shell.....................Done Initializing System Logger................Done Starting Application......................Done Starting LLC I/f..........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting Lpbk Proxy.......................Done Starting CDI..............................Done Include CME Starting T1 I/f...............Done Starting CAM I/f..........................Done Starting MME..............................Done Starting EtherBridge......................Done Starting DHCP Relay Agent.................Done Starting Peer ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Host ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Mobile IP Proxy Agent............Done Starting PCI Bridge.......................Done Starting Network Processor................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Selecting Config Data Source as EMS ......Done Initializing NvRam Mib ...................Done Booting Network Processor ................Done Configuring T1(s).........................Done Configuring ATM Interface.................Done 88 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Configuring IMA Group.....................Done Configuring IMA Link......................Done Configuring PVC(s)........................Done Configuring Management PVC................Done Initializing SNMP Agent ..................Done Pinging EMS (172.28.79.30)................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading BAUX..............................Done Loading BMCB..............................Done Loading MACA..............................Done Loading MACB..............................Done Loading CHAD..............................Done Loading CHTT..............................Done Loading CDSW..............................Done Loading BDSC..............................Done Loading CHSL..............................Done Loading CHMA..............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Stopping LLC Proxy........................Done Evaluating bootload status................Done Initializing DSP(s).......................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Updating Slot Table.......................Done Requesting EMS for Configuration Data ....Done Configuring BTS from EMS .................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting AtmMgmt..........................Done Configuring Diag Feature(s)...............Done
Z NNNN NNNNNN
(TM) ZZZ ZZZZZ NNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNN
NNNNNN NNNNNN
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZ NNNNNN NNNNNN
Z NNNNNN
ZZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN
ZZZ
NNNNNN
NNNNNN
NNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNN
NN
NNNNNN
ZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
NNNNNN
NNNNN
ZZZZZZ
NNN
ZZZZZZ
N
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ
N
N
NN
N N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N N
N
N
i
i aaa
v
v i n nn
i
a v
v i nn
n i aaaa v
v i n
n i
a
a
v v
NN
N
i n
n i aaaa
v
i n
n i
N E T W O R K S
(TM) Internet at the Speed of Thought (TM) NNNNNN
ZZZZZZ
Copyright (c) Navini Networks, Inc. NNNNNN
ZZZZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN
ZZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN NNNNN NNN
ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZ
N
Copyright (c) Conexant, Inc. Copyright (c) NComm, Inc. Copyright (c) RSA Data Security, Inc. Copyright (c) SNMP Research, Inc. Copyright (c) Texas Instruments, Inc.
2000-2001 Copyright (c) Wind River Systems, Inc. 1984-2000
1991-1992 2000-2002 2000-2001 1997-2001 1989-1999 KERNEL : 5.4(WIND version 2.5) BSP
: 1.0/01.19.00.00 CPU: CC (PPC860P).
Processor #0. Memory Size: 0x3f80000. WDB: Ready. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 89
Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Last reset caused by a power on condition. Current time is FRI JUL 12 14:26:59 2002 bts-4 [Active]% Attaching to TFFS... done. Loading /tffs0/LOADS/BTSB/core... 4337576 Starting at 0x10000... Auto-booting..............................Done The line items in Exhibit 9 are the ones that create and initialize the core components to the BTSs on-board file system. This file system is used to store operating code images, configuration data, and log files. The BTS Operating System software handles the images, data, and files and does not require operator assistance. There are three on-board file systems FLASH and RAM drives. The FLASH drive is at /tffs0 and the two RAM drives use /dev0 and /dev1. All on-board file system drives have dedicated functions and should not be altered or used through manual operations. Exhibit 9: On-board File Systems Starting File System......................Done Mounting Drive /tffs0.....................Done Mounting Drive /dev0......................Done Mounting Drive /dev1......................Done The sequence shown in Exhibit 10 initializes the TCP/IP stack on the BTS. The TCP, UDP, IP, and ARP protocol stacks are created. Interfaces for the stack are then created and attached to the stack. Three or four interfaces are created depending on the selection for traffic path in the boot parameters. The Fast Ethernet Controller, fec (0), is created and attached for the 10/100 Ethernet ports on the BTS. If atm is selected, then a WAN Ethernet Controller, WEC (0), is also created and attached to the stack to perform RFC1483 Ethernet bridging onto the ATM interface. Internally, the BTS utilizes a high-speed SLIP interface, sl (0), to provide communication between redundant devices. Finally, a debug local loopback interface, lo (0), is created and attached. Exhibit 10: TCP/IP Stack Starting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done Starting ARP..............................Done Starting fec I/f..........................Done Starting wec I/f..........................Done Attaching wec(0) I/f......................Done Attaching sl(0) I/f.......................Done Attaching fec(0) I/f......................Done Attaching lo(0) I/f.......................Done 90 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Next, the user interface through the console port on the BTS is activated. It should be noted however, that once the Telnet Daemon has been started, this same interface is available remotely through a password protected telnet session. You can access the remote shell service by telnetting directly to the well-known Telnet port (23) of the BTS:
Starting Telnet Daemon....................Done This invokes a suite of tools accessible by the Navini developers to assess runtime loads of various components in the system:
Starting Load Monitoring Tools............Done This creates a database of commands that can be issued from the shell:
Loading Target Shell Symbols..............Done This in turn invokes a suite of tools accessible by the Navini software developers to access runtime debugging of the system:
Starting WDB Tools........................Done This starts the actual interface for the console command interface:
Starting Target Shell.....................Done The BTS is equipped with a rich suite of logs that are automatically collected for analysis by Navini developers in the unlikely event a crash occurs. This line item invokes the automatic log collection:
Initializing System Logger................Done The core software is separated into operating system initialization and Ripwave application software that provides OAM and bridging functionality. This line item identifies the transition point from OS initialization to the point where the OS begins spawning application level tasks:
Starting Application......................Done The next task provides an interface to the Logical Link Control (LLC) on the MDM card and forms a conduit for all message and user traffic from the CC to MDM card. Starting LLC I/f..........................Done Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 91 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. A Command and Debug Interface is initialized to extend rudimentary target shell capabilities for Navini developers to diagnose problems with the Digital Signal Processors on the MDM and CHP cards:
Starting CDI..............................Done The Content Addressable Memory (CAM) is used to provide mappings of users to channels. This mapping interface is started at this point:
Starting CAM I/f..........................Done The management entity for CPE mobility, nomadicity, and access control security is handled by the MME application that is started at this point:
Starting MME..............................Done The protocol bridging performed by the BTS for user traffic is handled by the EtherBridge component. Depending on the traffic mode selected, the EtherBridge will perform varying protocol encapsulation methods, such as RFC1483 bridging over ATM. The bridge is started at this point:
Starting EtherBridge......................Done Network layer protocol security and mobility applications are handled by specialized protocol handler components. Various modes of operation are configurable through the EMS and provide such services as DHCP address learning and authentication assistance via the DHCP Relay Agent, Proxy ARP broadcast security, and network layer mobility support. These components are started at this point:
Starting DHCP Relay Agent.................Done Starting Peer ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Host ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Mobile IP Proxy Agent............Done An LLC Proxy is an object that provides relay service via the LLC IF conduit to the MDM card. Objects on the CC card can communicate with an object on the MDM card directly using such a proxy. Several such proxied objects exist and are created with this message:
Starting LLC Proxy........................Done As the CC card downloads and initializes the DSPs on the MDM and CHP cards, each component is identified with a Loading message:
Loading LLC...............................Done 92 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide The next item that appears notifies the user of the location where the BTS is retrieving its Management Information Base (MIB). After initial installation and provisioning through the boot line, EMS is selected as the Config Data Source. In this case, all remaining parameters are downloaded from the EMS. Once the BTS and EMS have synchronized and ownership of individual elements in the MIB negotiated, subsequent reboots of the BTS will indicate the local BTS copy of the MIB is being used. This reduces the burden and start-up time of a system-wide restart:
Selecting Config Data Source as BTS ......Done Once the MIB information is identified, the SNMP agent is initialized. At this point, the EMS can begin communicating with the BTS via this agent:
Initializing SNMP Agent ..................Done The BTS tests that a path through the WAN exists to its EMS Server. That test is identified next in the sequence. If the EMS is selected as the Config Data Source, the initialization cannot continue. If the BTS is selected as the data source, the BTS can continue to initialize. However, it will be unmanaged, as the EMS cannot communicate with the BTS. Pinging EMS (172.16.0.10).................Done A status message appears indicating that all DSPs have been downloaded and are now beginning the initialization process:
Bootload is a success.....................Done Initialization can take a significant period of time, with progress through the DSP initialization shown by a growing string of . on this line. Initialization is complete with Done on this line, and the configuration data is passed to the application entities on each device:
Initializing DSP(s).......................Done Configuring LLC Bandwidth Management......Done Configuring MAC Carrier Data..............Done Configuring MAC Bandwidth Management......Done Configuring Layer 1.......................Done Configuring CPE Descriptor Table .........Done The final step in the BTS initialization is to start up the GPS subsystem. With the GPS, the BTS will remain time synchronized with the other BTSs in the network:
Configuring GPS...........................Done Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 93 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. The BTS is now provisioned with minimal data. This is enough data to be able to calibrate and test the BTS. Power cycle the BTS for the changes to take place. An example of a reboot is shown in Exhibit 11. Exhibit 11: BTS Reboot - Example Stopping Ime..............................Done Stopping Cme..............................Done Stopping EtherBridge......................Done Stopping CAM I/f..........................Done Stopping Lpbk Proxy.......................Done Stopping LLC Proxy........................Done Stopping LLC I/f...........................Done
. Attaching to TFFS... done. Loading /tffs0/LOADS/btsb/core...5569208 Starting at 0x10000... Auto-booting..............................Done Starting File System......................Done Mounting Drive /tffs0.....................Done Mounting Drive /dev0......................Done Mounting Drive /dev1......................Done Starting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done Starting ARP..............................Done Starting motfec I/f.......................Done Attaching sl(0) I/f.......................Done Attaching motfec(0) I/f...................Done Attaching lo(0) I/f.......................Done Mounting Remote Filesystem................Done Starting Telnet Daemon....................Done Starting Load Monitoring Tools............Done Loading Target Shell Symbols..............Done Starting WDB Tools........................Done Starting Target Shell.....................Done Initializing System Logger................Done Starting Application......................Done Starting LLC I/f..........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting Lpbk Proxy.......................Done Starting CDI..............................Done Starting CAM I/f..........................Done Starting MME..............................Done Starting EtherBridge......................Done Starting ARP Conflict Detection...........Done Starting DHCP Relay Agent.................Done Starting Peer ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Host ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Mobile IP Proxy Agent............Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Selecting Config Data Source as BTS ......Done Initializing SNMP Agent ..................Done Loading BLLC..............................Done Pinging EMS (172.16.100.9)................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading BLLC..............................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done 94 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Loading CAP...............................Done Loading BAUX..............................Done Loading BMCB..............................Done Loading MACA..............................Done Loading MACB..............................Done Loading CHAD..............................Done Loading CHTT..............................Done Loading CDSW..............................Done Loading BDSC..............................Done Loading CHSL..............................Done Loading CHMA..............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Stopping LLC Proxy........................Done Evaluating bootload status................Done Initializing DSP(s).......................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Updating Slot Table.......................Done Configuring LLC Bandwidth Management......Done Configuring MAC Carrier Data..............Done Configuring MAC Bandwidth Management......Done Configuring Layer 1.......................Done Configuring CPE Descriptor Table .........Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Configuring Diag Feature(s)...............Done Configuring GPS...........................Done
Z NNNN NNNNNN
(TM) ZZZ ZZZZZ NNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNNNN
ZZZZZZ NNNNNN
NNNNNN NNNNNN
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZ NNNNNN NNNNNN
Z NNNNNN
ZZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN
ZZZ
NNNNNN
NNNNNN
NNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNN
NN
NNNNNN
ZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
NNNNNN
NNNNN
ZZZZZZ
NNN
ZZZZZZ
N
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ
N
N
NN
N N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N N
N
N
i
i aaa
v
v i n nn
i
a v
v i nn
n i aaaa v
v i n
n i
NN
N
a
a
v v
i n
n i aaaa
v
i n
n i
N E T W O R K S
(TM) Internet at the Speed of Thought (TM) NNNNNN NNNNNN
ZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZZZZZZ
Copyright(c)Navini Networks,Inc.2000-2002
Copyright(c)Conexant,Inc. 2000-2001 NNNNNN NNNNNN
ZZZZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZZ NNNN NNN ZZZZZZ ZZZZ
N
ZZ
Copyright(c)Free Sw Foundation,Inc.1988-1999
Copyright(c)NComm, Inc.1997-2001 Copyright(c)RSA Data Security,Inc.1991-1992 Copyright(c)SNMP Research,Inc.1989-1999 Copyright(c)Texas Instruments,Inc.2000-2001 Copyright(c)Wind River Systems,Inc.1984-2000 KERNEL : 5.4(WIND version 2.5) BSP
: 1.0/RW1.19.1.3 CPU: CC (PPC860P).
Processor #0. Memory Size: 0x3f80000. WDB: Ready. Last reset caused by a user request from the console. Current time is FRI JAN 10 14:38:36 2003 bts-120 [Active]% TimerHandler called for port /tty/2
--> 1/10/2003 14:38:38 Position fix: latitude: 32:58:42, longitude: -96:42:4, height: 188.78 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 95
Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Calibrate the Base Station Calibrating the Base Station detects the phase differential between the antennas and matches the output power across all antennas in the RFS. The calibration procedure must be performed at least three times to ensure validity. Ensure that the BTS has been powered on with the power amplifiers on for at least fifteen minutes to allow them time to warm up and stabilize. Calibration Procedure To calibrate the BTS, follow the steps in the procedure below. Refer to the Ripwave Configuration Guide, as needed. Step 1. On the Test EMS, click on the Server icon to start the EMS Server. Step 2. Click on the EMS Configuration icon to start the EMS Client GUI. Step 3. At the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager login screen, enter the user name and password. The defaults are emsAdmin / emsAdmin. Step 4. Verify that Antenna Power, RX Sensitivity, and Cal Cable Loss values are entered in the fields in the EMS. NOTE: The Power Splitter Loss was entered when you performed the RFS configuration earlier. Step 5. Click on the BTS that is being installed to select it. Right-click on the highlighted BTS and select Action > Configure. Refer to Figure 47. Figure 47: Select BTS Step 6. Click on Air Interface > Layer 1, and then click Calibrate. In the resulting dialog box
(Figure 48), select FULL CALIBRATION and Calibrate. 96 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure 48: Calibrate BTS Step 7. When the Warning window appears (Figure 49), click Yes. Figure 49: Warning Window Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 97 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 8. The Full Calibration window appears during system calibration (Figure 50). When calibration is complete, the Full Calibration window changes and displays the finish time and the result. Click the Close button to close the Full Calibration window. Note that the result of Done does not mean that the system passed calibration. Figure 50: Full Calibration Window Step 9. Click Show Configuration and select the Antenna Table tab (Figure 51). Check the Tx Gain and Rx Gain columns (the last two columns in the table) for transmit and receive results. The transmit and receive results for all eight antennas must be between 1 and 254. The eight values in each column should be relatively close to each other. A value of zero indicates a problem with the associated antenna path. Figure 51: Show Configuration/Antenna Table 98 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 10. Perform the calibration function two more times. Ensure each time that the values remain relatively stable (+/- 3), and that none of the results is zero. After you perform the second calibration, click on Configure. The Config Layer 1 Data window (Figure 52) shows the data from the second calibration. The values in the main screen from the Show Config selection are from the first calibration. Compare the values from the two calibrations to ensure that they are stable, and not equal to zero. Figure 52: Config Layer 1 Data Window Step 11. Close the Config Layer 1 Data window. Update the main screen by clicking the Show Configuration button. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 99 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Signal generator - Agilent 8648C, or equivalent, tunable to the RFS center frequency Spectrum analyzer - Agilent E4402B, or equivalent Two cables one will be a reference cable; the other will be a test cable RF coupler Verify the Calibration Base Station Calibration Verification is a set of procedures to verify that the equipment has passed calibration and that the RF portion of the equipment is operating within acceptable parameters. The results of the tests should be documented in the Base Station Calibration Verification Form, P/N 40-00059-00. This form, along with instructions, may be found in Appendix F. Test Cable & Coupler Insertion Loss Measurement This test measures the insertion loss of the test cable and coupler. Equipment Required Equipment Settings Turn on the Signal Generator and the Spectrum Analyzer. Allow the equipment to warm up for 15 minutes. Signal Generator:
Spectrum Analyzer:
Test Cable Sweep Setup Refer to Figures 53, 54, and 55 when performing the Test Cable procedure below. Span = 20 MHz Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) = 100 KHz Video Bandwidth (VBW) = Auto Sweep Time = Auto Frequency = BTS center frequency Output = Base Station center frequency Amplitude = Between 10 and +10 dBm 100 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Figure 53: Reference Cable Measurement Figure 54: Reference & Test Cable Measurements Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Reference Cable Reference Cable Signal Generator Signal Generator Signal Generator Signal Generator Reference Cable Reference Cable Test Cable Test Cable Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 101 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Signal Generator Signal Generator Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Figure 55: Coupler Measurement Test Procedure Step 1. Connect a test cable to the Signal Generator and to the Spectrum Analyzer. This will be Reference Cable Reference Cable Test Cable Test Cable Coupler Coupler the reference cable (Figure 53). Step 2. Turn on RF Power on the Signal Generator. Step 3. On the Spectrum Analyzer, set the reference level so that the signal peak is no more than 1 division down from the top of the screen, but does not go past the top of the screen. Step 4. Press the Peak Search button on the Analyzer. If the marker is bouncing excessively, turn on the averaging function. Adjust averaging to stabilize the marker but not slow down the sweep too much. Once the marker is stabilized, press Peak Search again to make sure you are on the peak, then press marker delta. This establishes the reference point for measurements. Step 5. Turn off RF Power on the Signal Generator. Disconnect the reference cable from the Spectrum Analyzer. Step 6. Connect the other test cable to be measured between the reference cable and the Spectrum Analyzer (Figure 54). This will be the test cable. Step 7. Turn on RF power on the Signal Generator. The delta between the markers is the loss/gain of the test cable or the coupler. Record that value in the appropriate field on the Base Station Calibration Verification Form. Step 8. Turn off RF Power on the Signal Generator. Step 9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 for the RF coupler (Figure 55). Leave the equipment on until the Base Station calibration verification test is complete. When finished, be sure to disable the RF Power on the Signal Generator. 102 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Receive Verification This test verifies the Receive function of the Base Station. Equipment Required Signal Generator - Agilent 8648C, or equivalent, tunable to the RFS center frequency Oscilloscope Agilent 54622 D, or equivalent Test cable (optional) Test Channel Processor board Note: Some test equipment may have a DC block for input protection. If so, do not remove the DC block from the equipment. Equipment Settings Ensure that the Signal Generator and the Spectrum Analyzer have been allowed to warm up for 15 minutes before beginning testing. Signal Generator:
Output frequency = Base Station center frequency + 300 KHz (i.e. if the center frequency of the BTS is 2640.5 MHz, set the Signal Generator frequency to 2640.8 MHz). Output power = The RF Power injected at the cal cable to get sensitivity at the antenna
(line 25) of the Base Station Calibration Verification Form. This value cannot be obtained until steps 1 5 of this test are performed. Oscilloscope:
Horizontal sweep = 100 us/division Amplitude = 200 mV/division. Setting is arbitrary depending on the environment. It should be as low as possible, while still being able to differentiate between signals. Channel = AC coupled Bandwidth (BW) = 20 MHz Limiting = on Trigger = EXT (or channel 2 if used) Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 103 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Test Procedure Follow the steps in the procedure below. Step 1. Ensure that system calibration has been successfully performed. Step 2. Enter the value for receive sensitivity (line 23) into the Base Station Calibration Verification Form. It is located in the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) GUI by selecting the BTS, then selecting air interface > layer 1 > show configuration. Select the General tab. Step 3. Enter the value for the test cable loss (line 24) into the Base Station Calibration Verification Form. Test cable loss has to be measured before testing begins. If a test cable is not used, enter zero for test cable loss in the Base Station Calibration Verification Form. Step 4. Enter the values for the antenna cable loss and RFS sweeps (measured) into the Base Station Calibration Verification Form under cable loss (lines 40 to 48) and insertion loss through cal cable and RFS (lines 54 to 69). The values are obtained from the RFS System Test Form. Step 5. Record the DAC words for RX gain from EMS Layer 1 data into the Base Station Calibration Verification Form (lines 90 to 97). It is located in the EMS Configuration
& Alarm Manager by selecting the BTS, then select air interface > layer 1 >
show configuration. Select the Antenna tab. Step 6. Set the Output power of the Signal Generator equal to the RF Power injected at the cal cable to get sensitivity at the antenna (line 25) of the Base Station Calibration Verification Form. Ensure that the spreadsheet has calculated the value by pressing F9 to calculate. Step 7. Confirm that all CPEs are turned off. Enter the command ebCamShow at the BTS console to check for packets being transferred. Run the command two or three times to validate that packet numbers are not changing. Step 8. Set the power switch on the BTS to OFF. Step 9. Remove the CHP-A board from the BTS chassis. Step 10. Install the CHP test board into the CHP-A slot in the BTS chassis. Step 11. Set the power switch on the BTS to ON. Step 12. Set up the test equipment as shown in Figure 56. 104 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide RFS RFS Channel 1 Channel 1 Oscilloscope Oscilloscope Signal Generator Signal Generator Calibration cable Calibration cable Test Cable (optional) Test Cable (optional) To test points To test points on CHP card on CHP card 8 RF cables from 8 RF cables from the RFS connected the RFS connected to the BTS to the BTS Figure 56: Test Equipment for Receive Verification Step 13. Adjust the Oscilloscope to view only the receive timeframe, as shown in Figure 57. Ext. Trigger on the rear Ext. Trigger on the rear of the scope, If available. of the scope, If available. Or use Channel 2 input Or use Channel 2 input and select it as the trigger and select it as the trigger source. source. To the TDD SYNC To the TDD SYNC connector on the connector on the back of the BTS back of the BTS
(if enabled)
(if enabled) Test Points on Test Points on Test Points on CHP Test Board CHP Test Board CHP Test Board D D D B B B C C C A A A BTS BTS Center the quietest area of one RX frame in the middle of the screen. Adjust the horizontal sweep for 100 to 200 us/division to obtain the best reading. This ensures that you measure only the noise of the receive frame. The amplitude for each channel should be approximately 200 mV/division. This setting is arbitrary depending on the environment. The setting should be as low as possible, and you should still be able to differentiate between the signals. Set the Oscilloscope to display the RMS (average) voltage of the waveform. If the equipment permits, also display the peak-to-peak value. Setting the channel on the Oscilloscope to AC, coupled with BW limit on, limits the noise being measured to less than 20 MHz in bandwidth. The objective is to measure only the noise within the receiver bandwidth (5 - 6 MHz). Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 105 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure 57: Oscilloscope Receive Time Step 14. Measure the RMS voltage (in mV) in the quietest area of each of the four baseband signals from the front of the Channel Processor test board test points A, B, C, D. Enter the values into the Base Station Calibration Verification Form under receiver performance - noise level (lines 76 to 79). To ensure that there are no surges or random interference signals included in the measurement, use the single sweep function on the Oscilloscope. Figure 57 shows an example of unwanted noise bursts in the waveform. Step 15. Turn on the Signal Generators RF output. Step 16. Measure the RMS voltage (in mV) on the Oscilloscope (signal + noise, S+N) in the quietest area of each of the four baseband signals from the front of the Channel Processor test board test points A, B, C, D. Enter the values into the Base Station Calibration Verification Form under receiver performance - noise + signal (lines 76 to 79). If the calibration was successful, then all of the levels should be between 180 and 240 mV rms. The spreadsheet will then calculate the signal, SNR, noise power, and relative noise figure. For example, values typically are -102, 10, and 3.5 dB for a 2.6 GHz system. Step 17. Turn off the Signal Generators RF output. Step 18. Set the power switch on the BTS to OFF. Step 19. Remove the CHP test board from the BTS chassis. Step 20. Install the CHP-A board into the BTS chassis. Step 21. Remove the CHP-B board from the BTS chassis. Step 22. Install the CHP test board into the CHP-B slot in the BTS chassis. Step 23. Set the power switch on the BTS to ON. 106 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 24. After the BTS boots up, repeat steps 12 thru 17 for the CHP test board in the CHP-B slot. Enter the data into the Base Station Calibration Verification Form (lines 80 to 83). Spectrum analyzer - Agilent E4402B, or equivalent Coupler Attenuator - 30 dB, 25 watt Terminator - 50 ohm, 5 watt Step 25. Turn off the Oscilloscope. Step 26. Set the power switch on the BTS to OFF. Step 27. Remove the CHP test board from the BTS chassis. Step 28. Install the CHP-B board into the BTS chassis. Step 29. Set the power switch on the BTS to ON. Step 30. Ensure the BTS boots up without any faults. Transmitter Verification This test verifies the Transmit function of the Base Station. Equipment Required Equipment Settings Ensure that the Signal Generator and the Spectrum Analyzer have been allowed to warm up for at least 15 minutes before beginning testing. Spectrum Analyzer:
Center Frequency = BTS center frequency Span = 0 Hz RBW = 5 MHz *
VBW = Auto Sweep Time = 15 ms TRIG = Video ** (adjust level to stabilize signal) Display line = On Reference level = Adjust to display entire signal Detector = RMS ***
Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 107 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc.
* If the Spectrum Analyzer will not support 5 MHz RBW, use the following formula to determine the correction factor: 10 * log10 (5 MHz /RBW). Add this value to the measurements.
**If possible, connect a cable from the TDD SYNC connector on the back of the BTS to the EXT TRIGGER input on the rear of the Spectrum Analyzer. Set the TRIG to EXT.
***If the RMS detector is not available, measure with the peak detector and subtract 9.5 dB for peak to average ratio (calculated by the spreadsheet). This value is determined by measuring both the peak detected and RMS detected power values, then taking the average of the two readings. Due to equipment variations, this value will not always be the same; however, it should be within +/- 1 dB. Test Procedure WARNING! Before performing the procedure below, disable power to the transceiver modules before disconnecting any RF cables. All antenna cables must be connected to the BTS during testing except for the one that is being tested. Step 1. Disable the RF shelf by turning off the power to the Transceiver modules. From the EMS GUI, select the BTS. Then from the menu bar select action > disable. Ensure that the Power LED on each Transceiver module is off. Also ensure that the A1 A8 LEDs on the CC card are off. Step 2. Disconnect the RF cable for the channel being tested from the back of the BTS. All other RF cables must be connected to the BTS. Step 3. Connect the Spectrum Analyzer, Coupler, Attenuator, and 50 ohm Terminator to the RF input on the BTS, as shown in Figure 58. The RF cable for the channel being tested is not connected during the test. 108 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide RFS RFS tested tested tested the RFS are the RFS are the RFS are All cables from All cables from All cables from connected to the connected to the connected to the BTS except for BTS except for BTS except for the channel being the channel being the channel being Figure 58: Test Equipment for Transmitter Verification Step 4. Enable the RF shelf by turning on the power to the Transceiver modules. From the Connect the Connect the Connect the Coupler input Coupler input Coupler input directly to the directly to the directly to the BTS antenna BTS antenna BTS antenna output to be output to be output to be measured measured measured Connect the TDD Sync Connect the TDD Sync Connect the TDD Sync connector on the back of connector on the back of connector on the back of the BTS to the External the BTS to the External the BTS to the External Trigger input on the Trigger input on the Trigger input on the Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 5W 50 ohm 5W 50 ohm 5W 50 ohm Terminator Terminator Terminator Coupler Coupler
(20dB min)
(20dB min) Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Coupled Coupled port port Attenuator Attenuator 30dB 30dB 25W 25W BTS BTS EMS GUI, select the BTS. Then from the menu bar select action > enable. Ensure that the Power LED on each Transceiver module is on. Also ensure that the A1 A8 LEDs on the CC card are on. Step 5. On the Spectrum Analyzer, adjust the display line to the top of the sync signal, as shown in Figure 59. Measure the signal level. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 109 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Display Display Line Line Figure 59: Sync Signal Step 6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for the remaining seven antenna outputs. Record the peak value into the spreadsheet under analyzer readings Peak (lines 90 to 97). Step 7. Enter the value for antenna power that is set in the EMS into the spreadsheet (line 30). It is located in the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager GUI by selecting the BTS, then selecting air interface > layer 1 > show configuration. Select the General tab. Step 8. Enter the Coupler/test cable loss (line 31) and antenna gain (line 32) (8 dBi for 2.4 GHz and 17 dBi for 2.6 GHz systems) into the spreadsheet. Step 9. Record the DAC words for the TX gain from EMS Layer 1 data into the spreadsheet
(lines 93 to 100). From the EMS GUI, select the BTS. Then select air interface >
layer 1 > show configuration. Select the Antenna tab. Step 10. Verify that RMS power at the antenna (lines 90 to 97, column G) is within +/- 1 dB of antenna power (line 30) and that the deviation across all eight antennas is less than or equal to 3 dB. Export BTS Data Once you complete the calibration verification, export the BTS configuration data to a text file. This is done by highlighting the specific BTS in the CAM window, and on the Main Menu select File > Export BTS Data. This saves the configuration information if needed for later retrieval. 110 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Perform Local CPE Tests Local wireline, then over-the-air, CPE testing will verify that the Base Station is working and is able transmit and receive data. Data rates are not being checked at this time. Refer to Figure 60 when setting up and performing the Wired CPE procedures. Wired CPE Test Equipment Required CPE - Ordinate the Ripwave Modem (CPE) PC - Laptop with CPE debug tool. Connect to CPE with an Ethernet cable Attenuator - 70dB fixed attenuation, plus 40 adjustable range with 1dB resolution
(cascade multiple attenuators) Shielding box - Need to provide 80dB isolation. Shielding box may not be needed if the CPE cannot sync to BTS over-the-air at the test location. Figure 60: Wired CPE Setup Shielding box Shielding box BTS BTS cable cable CPE CPE PC PC Calibration Calibration Attenuator Attenuator Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 111 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Equipment Settings Part of the Test Procedures below. Test Procedure Setup Set up the test procedures, per the following. Step 1. Calibrate and sanity check the BTS. Step 2. Connect the CPE and the attenuators. The combined attenuation should be set roughly as follows:
Total attenuation = PTX - 30 + 18 - Cal cable loss + 80 Where PTX is the Tx output power at antenna input port that is set in EMS during calibration. Cal cable loss is the loss of the calibration cable. The total attenuation should be partitioned between fixed and adjustable attenuators in such a way that the adjustable attenuator is set to about 10dB. Step 3. Disconnect the calibration cable from the back of the BTS shelf and connect it to the attenuator as shown in the drawing Step 4. Ping the BTS continuously from the CPE. Step 5. Check the sync level at the CPE debug tool. The level should be about -80dBm. Test Procedure - Check CPE Sensitivity & Output Power Follow the steps in the procedure below. Step 1. Record the downlink TCC power level and SNR reading on the CPE debug tool. Step 2. Calculate the effective noise floor: NF= SNRTCC - LevelTCC. Where SNRTCC is the TCC SNR and LevelTCC is the received downlink TCC level. NF should be close to -127 5. Increase the attenuation by 10dB (increase the attenuation of the adjustable attenuator). Step 3. Check CPE output power cap difference. It should be greater than 0. Step 4. Step 5. Measure the effective noise floor and the output power cap difference gain. Step 6. Increase the attenuation by another 10dB and take the measurements again (if the link is broken when the attenuation increases 10dB, back off the attenuation by 10dB and then increase the attenuation with 1dB steps until the link is broken. Then reduce the attenuation by 4dB). 112 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 7. Calculate the maximum path allowed as follows:
Max loss = Attenuation total + Cal cable loss + 30 Where Attenuation total is the total attenuation of all attenuators (fixed + adjustable). Test Procedure - Check BTS Sensitivity (Individual Antenna) Step 1. Set the attenuation of the attenuator so the total attenuation is about PTX - 30 - Cal cable loss +80. Step 2. Activate antenna #1 only. Step 3. Record the uplink TCC power level and SNR reading on the BTS debug tool. Step 4. Calculate the effective noise floor: NF= SNRTCC - LevelTCC. Where SNRTCC is the TCC SNR and LevelTCC is the received downlink TCC level. NF should be close to: SNR - BTS Sensitivity + 25 5. Where BTS sensitivity is the BTS sensitivity setting during calibration. Increase the attenuation by 10dB (increase the attenuation of the adjustable attenuator). Step 5. Record the CPE output power. Step 6. Step 7. Measure BTS effective noise floor and CPE output power again. Step 8. Increase the attenuation by another 10dB and take the measurements again (if the link is broken when the attenuation increases 10dB, back off the attenuation by 10dB and then increase the attenuation with 1dB steps until the link is broken. Then reduce the attenuation by 4dB. The same attenuation will be used for all antenna tests). Step 9. Calculate the maximum path allowed as follows:
Max loss = Attenuation total + Cal cable loss + 30 Where Attenuation total is the total attenuation of all attenuators (fixed + adjustable). Step 10. Repeat the steps for antennas 2 through 8. Step 11. Average the CPE output power over antennas 1~8 for each attenuation setting. Test Procedure - Check BTS Sensitivity (Antenna Array) Step 1. Set the initial attenuation the same as in the individual antenna testing procedure. Step 2. Activate all antennas. Step 3. Record the uplink TCC power level and SNR reading on BTS debug tool. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 113 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 4. Calculate the effective noise floor: NF= SNRTCC - LevelTCC. Where SNRTCC is the TCC SNR and LevelTCC is the received uplink TCC level. NF should be close to SNR - BTS Sensitivity +25 5. Where BTS sensitivity is the BTS sensitivity setting during calibration. Increase the attenuation by 10dB (increase the attenuation of the adjustable attenuator). Step 5. Record the CPE output power. Step 6. Step 7. Measure BTS effective noise floor and CPE output power again. Step 8. Increase the attenuation by the same amount as in individual antenna tests and measure the BTS effective noise floor and CPE output power. Step 9. For each attenuation setting, the CPE output power should be 9dB less compared to those (average) in individual antenna tests. Step 10. Increase the attenuation by another 18dB. The link should be on. Step 11. Calculate the maximum path allowed as follows:
Max loss = Attenuation total + Cal cable loss + 30 Where Attenuation total is the total attenuation of all attenuators (fixed + adjustable). Test Procedure - Data Rate Step 1. Set the attenuation of the attenuator so the total attenuation is about PTX - 30 +18 - Cal cable loss + 80. Step 2. Activate all antennas. Step 3. FTP a file with size >10Mbps from CPE to BTS (uplink). Step 4. Check the uplink data rate. It should be ~1Mbps. Step 5. FTP a file with size >20Mbps from BTS to CPE (downlink). Step 6. Check the downlink data rate. It should be ~2Mbps. After the test is completed, reconnect the calibration cable back to the BTS and run the calibration. The new calibration table should be the same as before (the changes in Tx and Rx AGC should be within 2 bits). 114 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Over-the-air CPE Test Equipment Required Same as for Wired CPE Test. Equipment Settings Included in the Test Procedure. Test Procedure To set up a CPE for local over-the-air testing, follow the steps below. Step 1. Connect a CPE to a test computer. Reference the Ripwave CPE User Guide, P/N 40-
00026-00 for CPE setup procedures. The location of the test computer setup needs to be close to the Base Station, within its coverage range. Step 2. Ensure that the CPE is registered in the EMS. Refer to EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) User Guide, P/N 40-00016-00, for CPE registration procedures. Step 3. Using FTP software, transfer a 2 Mb file over-the-air from the test computer to the BTS. This is a system uplink transfer. Step 4. Using FTP software, transfer a 10 Mb file over-the-air from the BTS to the test computer. This is a system downlink transfer. Step 5. Ensure that both files transferred during testing. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 115 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Install & Test Customer EMS Operations If you have been using a Test EMS up to this point, you will now need to install and test the customers EMS server. This involves installing the EMS Server and Client on a computer that is connected through the system backhaul. If the customers EMS is already installed and has been used for testing purposes, skip to the Verify System Performance section of this chapter. Install EMS Software The EMS software installation procedures can be found in the EMS Software Installation manual, P/N 40-00017-00. After installing the EMS Server and Client applications, the EMS needs to be configured with the settings that are designated for the Base Station. The settings are found in the Network Architecture Plan provided by the customer. Ensure connection between the Base Station and the backhaul. The connection to the Base Station will be either an Ethernet connection or T1 connections. Verify EMS to Base Station Connectivity Follow the steps below to ensure the EMS and Base Station can communicate. Step 1. Open a Command Prompt window on the computer where the EMS is installed. Step 2. Ping the Base Station using the CLI command ping <base station ip address>. Verify a reply from the Base Station. Perform Calibration Using Customers EMS This step is necessary only if you have been using a Test EMS up to this point. You will need to install the customers EMS server and software. Calibrate the Base Station using the customers EMS. Follow the same calibration procedures described earlier in this chapter, Calibrate the Base Station. Perform the procedure three times and make sure that the results are stable (+/- 3). 116 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Verify System Performance Drive Study The preliminary Drive Study is performed if no RF coverage model is available. The Drive Study helps you to map out the coverage area. Later, the full Drive Study is performed to see if the systems coverage area is as predicted and, if necessary, to fine-tune the RF model. Following the detailed Drive Study procedures in Appendix G, you will perform a preliminary Drive Study by driving back and forth through a sector, staying on major roads about a kilometer apart. Special attention has to be paid to the null and fringe areas. You will follow this scheme for each sector in the site, recording the results of all tests. The test results will be sent for evaluation, along with the Location (FTP) test results, to Navini Networks Technical Support. If the results are not adequate, Technical Support will have you adjust some of the RF parameters and perform the Drive Study again. Location (FTP) Test Location Tests are performed to see if the system file transfer functions are working as predicted between CPE and Base Station. These are conducted in stages as well. The first stage is the preliminary Location Test, where you perform three uploads and three downloads at three locations with the Base Station in line-of-sight (LOS). Then you perform three uploads and three downloads at three locations with the Base Station in non-line-of-sight (NLOS). For the NLOS testing, you will need to find an obstacle, such as a building, between the CPE and Base Station. Results are sent, along with the preliminary Drive Study results, to Navini Networks Technical Support for evaluation. If the results are not adequate - i.e., file transfers do not meet customers objectives - Technical Support will have you adjust some of the RF parameters and perform the Location tests again. The detailed Location Test procedures and form are located in Appendix H. To summarize, these are the high-level steps for verifying system performance:
1. Conduct preliminary Drive Study (if no RF coverage map is available). 2. Conduct preliminary LOS Location Tests. 3. Conduct preliminary NLOS Location Tests. 4. Send all test results to Navinis Technical Support for evaluation. 5. If directed by Technical Support, adjust RF parameters. 6. Conduct full Drive Study. 7. Conduct full LOS Location Tests. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 117 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 8. Conduct full NLOS Location Tests. 9. Send all test results to Navinis Technical Support for evaluation. The cycle continues until the performance objectives are reached. Verify System Operation With Multiple CPEs Set up three computers with CPEs connected to them. Perform file transfers from all three computers to verify Base Station operation. Back Up EMS Database After all system installation and commissioning activities are complete, perform a backup of the EMS database. The procedure can be found in the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) User Guide, P/N 40-000-16-00. Place the backup files on a system server where they will be periodically backed up on a tape drive. Customer Acceptance To conclude the installation and commissioning activities, gather all of the required documents and forms from the installation and commissioning procedures to create a comprehensive system I&C package. The customer and Navini Networks will sign the Customer Acceptance Form. A copy of this form is provided in Appendix I. The signed form and the system I&C package are provided to the customer. The original, signed Customer Acceptance Form and system I&C package are stored in the Navini Networks Technical Support database. 118 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix A: Ordering Documentation & Forms Navini Networks product documentation and forms may be ordered by calling 1-972-852-4200, or by using the web site: www.navini.com. Select Support / Technical Support. Document Name STANDARD DOCUMENTATION CD EMS Overview Manual EMS Software Installation Guide EMS Administration Guide Ripwave Configuration Guide EMS Configuration CLI Reference Manual EMS Alarm Resolution Reference Manual EMS Diagnostic Tools Guide Ripwave Modem Quick Installation Guide Ripwave Modem User Guide Ripwave Modem Software Update Tool - Quick Guide VAR I&C DOCUMENTATION CD Site Design Documents:
RFS Omni Data Sheet RFS Panel Data Sheet BTS Outdoor Selection Guide Rectifier/Battery Back-up (BBU) Specification Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM) Template Installation & Commissioning Documents:
Base Station Installation & Commissioning Guide EMS Software Installation RFS Configuration Quick Guide BTS Configuration Data Form EMS Configuration Data Form CPE Configuration Data Form Site Candidate Evaluation Form RFS System Test Form Base Station Installation Certification Form Base Station Calibration Verification Form Location (FTP) Tests Form Drive Study Survey Procedures Drive Study Survey Form Customer Acceptance Form Operations Documents:
Ripwave Modem Quick Installation Guide Component/Part Number 95-00116-00 40-00016-03 40-00017-00 40-00031-00 40-00016-01 40-00016-02 40-00033-00 40-00032-00 40-00112-00/40-00098-00 English
/40-00096-00 Spanish 40-00111-00/40-00097-00 English
/40-00099-00 Spanish 40-00066-00 95-00017-00 44-00037-00 44-00038-00 44-00035-00 44-00036-00 00-30003-00 40-00047-00 40-00017-00 40-00067-00 44-00032-00 44-00034-00 44-00033-00 40-00091-00 40-00085-00 40-00092-00 40-00059-00 40-00077-00 40-00087-00 40-00076-00 40-00117-00 40-00112-00/40-00098-00 English
/40-00096-00 Spanish Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 119 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Modem User Guide EMS Administration Guide Ripwave Configuration Guide EMS CLI Reference Manual EMS Alarm Resolution Reference Manual EMS Diagnostic Tools User Guide 40-00111-00/40-00097-00 English
/40-00099-00 Spanish 40-00031-00 40-00016-01 40-00016-02 40-00033-00 40-00032-00 120 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix B: Site Candidate Evaluation Form NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM PN - 40-00091-00 Site Name Date FSE SITE INFORMATION COMPANY NAME ADDRESS SITE OWNER SITE CONTACT NO. GPS COORDINATES ANT TYPE (OMNI, PANEL) ENCLOSURE TYPE (HUT, ETC) TOWER TYPE (SS, MP,ETC) SITE ACCESS RESTRICTIONS DRIVE TO DIRECTIONS OMNI PANEL 2.3GHZ 2.4GHZ 2.5GHZ 2.6GHZ LAT LONG 24HRS 8-5PM ELEV (AMSL) HEIGHT (AGL) FEET FEET OTHER SITE CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION YES INDOOR YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES BTS Space Availability (3' x 3') Room for Expansion BTS Type/Size of Cabinet required 110VAC, 20A Available/Distance AC Outlet Available/Distance 24VDC, 60A Available/Distance Breaker(s) Required Sub-metering Required Ground Available/Distance Gnd Buss Bar Available/Distance Cable Entry Available Cable Routing Distance Kind of Entry Material Kind of Sealing Required Site Plans Available Cable Tray Available Cable Hangers Required Floor/Wall Drilling Permitted Airconditioning Available Telco/LAN/WAN Available Demarc Location/Distance Room has Adequate Lighting Room has Adequate Ventilation Any Door Entry Restrictions Enclosure Access Crane/Heavy Eqpmt Required Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 YES YES YES Ground YES YES YES YES YES YES YES x NO OUTDOOR NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Elevator NO x AC DC FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET DOOR DIMENSION OTHER 121 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 TOWER/ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION Proposed Antenna Height Cable Run Length to entry port Ant Space Available (10' spacing) Special Bracket Required Cable Hangers Required Crane/Heavy Eqpmt Required Structural Test Required Interference Test Required GPS Location Available GPS Comments / Details Detailed Tower Description FEET FEET YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO COMMENTS COMMENTS OTHER OTHER OTHER OTHER OTHER OTHER CABLE RUN LENGTH IN FEET TOWER PICTURE 122 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 SITE MAP / SKETCH GPS ANTENNA LOCATION Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 123 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 NORTH VIEW NORTHEAST VIEW 124 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 EAST VIEW SOUTHEAST VIEW Comments Comments Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 125 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 SOUTH VIEW SOUTHWEST VIEW 126 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 WEST VIEW NORTHWEST VIEW Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 127 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 EXISTING COMPOUND PICTURE GROUNDING 128 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 INGRESS EGRESS Comments Comments Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 129 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 POWER TELCO 130 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 SHELTER PICTURE SHELTER LAYOUT AND DIMENSION DRAWING Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 131 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 132 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix C: RFS System Test (Cable Sweeps) Introduction Before installing a Base Station at a site, the RFS and the associated cables must be tested, and the results of the tests documented. The tests verify the performance of three major components:
the data/power cable, the RF cables, and the RFS unit. This procedure includes, as well, the full RFS sub-assembly with the associated cables. All results for the RFS and cable testing are recorded in the RFS System Test Form, P/N 40-00093-00. Procedures RFS Data/Power Cable This test will check the integrity of the data/power cable. The cable being tested consists of six twisted pairs of conductors. The conductors will be tested for continuity, opens, and shorts. Male connectors are on both ends of the cable. Each connector is wired the same. You will need to check all cables the main cable from the RFS to the data/power cable surge protector, and the jumper cable from the data/power cable surge protector to the BTS. The pin layout is shown in Figure C1, looking at the connector face. Table C1 provides the pinout details. Figure C1: Pin Layout M G C H D A B F L J E K Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 133 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Circular Wire Color Signal Name Connector(s) A B C D E F G H J K L M POWER CABLE PIN OUT Wire Color RED BLACK BROWN DRAIN BLACK WHITE BLUE BLACK BLACK GREEN BLACK YELLOW
+12V A
+12V A RTN Heater GND (Shield Wire) RX_EN_B-
RX_EN_B+
RX_EN_A+
RX_EN_A-
Diagbus-
Diagbus+
+12V B Return
+12V B Table C1: Pinout Details Perform the continuity test with both the Volt Ohm Meter (VOM) and the power/data cable tester. If the power/data cable tester is not available, perform the continuity test with the VOM. Required Equipment Continuity Test With VOM Step 1. On one end of the cable, short a pair of conductors using a shorting device. Step 2. Using a VOM/Digital Volt Meter (DVM) set to ohms, verify a short is present on the VOM Continuity tester Jumper for shorting pins RFS power/data cable tester PAIR pair at the other end. Step 3. Leaving one probe on one of the paired pins, contact all of the other pins with the other probe, ensuring an open connection. Step 4. Check all 6 pairs of wires in the same manner. Step 5. Verify continuity from the connector case to the drain wire (pin D) on each end of the cable and between each connector case. Step 6. Verify an open circuit from the connector case to each individual wire, except to the drain wire. 134 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Continuity Test With Power/Data Cable Tester Step 1. Connect one end of the power/data cable to the connector on the power/data cable tester. Step 2. Using a VOM/DVM set to ohms, check resistance to ground on the other end of the cable. Resistance is checked from the case of the connector to the individual pin. Resistance readings (+/- 10 percent ) are shown in Table C2. Table C2: Resistance to Ground Pin A B E F Resistance 1K ohms 2K ohms 3.3K ohms 5.1K ohms Pin G H L M Resistance 6.2K ohms 8.2K ohms 10K ohms 12K ohms Step 3. Using a VOM/DVM set to ohms, check resistance between the pairs on the other end of the cable. Resistance should be the sum of the resistance of the two pairs, +/- 10 percent. Refer to Table C3. Table C3: Resistance of Two Pairs Pins A & B E & F Resistance 3K ohms 8.4K ohms Pins G & H L & M Resistance 14.4K ohms 22K ohms Step 4. Remove the power/data cable tester from the power/data cable. Sweep Test of RF Cables & RFS Sweep testing of the RF cables and the RFS is performed in three separate steps. Sweep of the cables Sweep of the RFS Sweep of the cables and the RFS together All results will be entered in the RFS System Test Form, P/N 40-00093-00. The total of the insertion loss for the cables and the RFS will be equal to the insertion loss of both parts swept together. The minimum and maximum cable loss are listed in Table C4. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 135 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Table C4: Active & Passive RFS Loss / Operating Parameters CAL Cable Min Loss CAL Cable Max Loss RF Cable Min Loss
[dB]
Active RFS Loss Typ
[dB]
Passive RFS Loss Typ
[dB]
TX Pwr to Ant Max
[dBm]
RX Power to Ant Min
[dBm]
RX Power to Ant Max
[dBm]
PA Max Output Power
[dBm]
2.3 2.4
+38
+37 BTS Max Output power with
*Filter
[dBm]
+37 N/A 2.4
+37 N/A 3.0 4.0 3.0 6.0 9.5 4.5 0 0 0 3.2 3.2 3.2 1.7 1.7 1.7 TX Pwr to Ant Min
[dBm]
20 10 18 0 4.5 3.2 3.0 0 0
+37
+35 20 20 1.7 1.7 3.2 3.2 6.0 6.0 3.0 3.0
+38
+38
+39
+39 2.5 2.6 EF GH 2.6 EF
* Channel filter for 2.5/2.6 or Block Filter for 2.3 has 1.0 +/- 0.2 dB Insertion Loss
* Channel filter for 2.6 EF Combo is 1.8 +/- 0.2 dB including cable to backplane. Equipment Required 1.7 20 Signal Generator - Agilent 8648C, or suitable alternative, tunable to the RFS center frequency Spectrum Analyzer - Agilent E4402B, or equivalent Signal Generator cable and Spectrum Analyzer cable Gender can be changed using a barrel connector Male and Female barrel connectors for Signal Generator cable and Spectrum Analyzer cable connections Power/data test cable Navini RFS Test Box Notes
-05 SYN
-01 SYN
-05 SYN 35 25 30 35 35 35
-95
-85
-95
-95
-95
-75
-65
-70
-75
-75
-95
-75 Equipment Settings Spectrum Analyzer:
Signal Generator:
Spectrum Analyzer - 5M RBW - 100 KHz VBW - 100 KHz Sweep Time - Auto Frequency (Provided in Table C5) Amplitude - 0 dB Frequency (Provided in Table C5) 136 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Test Setup When performing each type of sweep, the sweep has to be performed at certain frequency intervals (Table C5). Perform the complete test at the first frequency. Go to the next frequency and recalibrate the test setup. Perform the complete test again. Do the same for the third frequency. Refer to Figure C2. Table C5: Sweep Frequencies System 2.3 GHz High band 2.3 GHz Low band 2.4 GHz 2.5 GHz 2.6 GHz 2.6 GHz EFGH Sweep 1 2348.25 2307.50 2400.00 2500.00 2602.00 2602.00 Sweep 2 2352.50 2312.50 2440.00 2548.00 2620.00 2641.00 Sweep 3 2357.50 2316.75 2473.50 2596.00 2641.00 2683.00 Signal Generator Signal Generator 1. Connect the Signal Generator cable to the Signal Generator. 2. Connect the Spectrum Analyzer cable to the Spectrum Analyzer. 3. Connect the other end of the cables together. Use a barrel connector if needed. Figure C2: Test Setup Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer
(if needed)
(if needed) Cable Cable Cable Cable Barrel Connector Barrel Connector Signal Generator Signal Generator Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 137 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Test Procedure The following procedures are for the Agilent E4402B Spectrum Analyzer. If alternative equipment is used, refer to the manufacturers calibration procedures. The key point is to make accurate microwave frequency power measurements. Step 1. Turn the Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer on. Allow the equipment to warm up for 15 minutes for the output to stabilize. Step 2. Set the Signal Generator frequency to the desired test frequency (Table C5) of the RFS under test. Step 3. Set the Signal Generator output amplitude to 0 dBm. Step 4. Set the center frequency of the Spectrum Analyzer to the center frequency of the RFS under test. Step 5. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to Span = 5 MHz and Resolution Bandwidth = 100kHz. Step 6. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to that shown in Figure C3. Figure C3: Sweep Test Marker Measurement Example Step 7. If the marker measurement doesnt read 0.0 dBm, adjust the amplitude on the Signal Generator until the Spectrum Analyzer marker reads 0.0 dBm, or as close to 0.0 dBm as possible. This will remove all losses associated with the test cables. All measurement data should be recorded one digit to the right of the decimal point. For example, 31.5dB. Once the test setup is calibrated, these cables will remain in place and will be used throughout the whole test. If the test cables are removed or changed, incorrect readings will result. 138 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide RF Cable Insertion Loss This test is performed on all RF cables that are installed in the system. This includes the eight antenna cables, the system calibration cable, and all jumper cables. Follow the procedures for either the cables on the ground or cables run up the tower. Test Procedure For RF Cables on the Ground Step 1. Ensure calibration of the test setup has been performed each time the test frequency is Step 2. changed. If present, remove the barrel connector from between the Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer cables. Step 3. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to one end of the cable. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 4. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the other end of the cable. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 5. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure C4. Figure C4: Insertion Loss (Cables on Ground) Marker Measurement Example Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 139 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 6. The result should be within +/- 0.5 dB of the calculated value. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the connectors for proper connection to the cable, and check for kinks in the cable. If the Spectrum Analyzer has a distance to fault (DTF) function, it can be used to help troubleshoot kinks in the cable. CAUTION! Cables with results greater than the specified limits (i.e., 2 or 3 dB high) should not be installed, as a potential hardware fault exists. Step 7. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under MAIN FEEDER LOSS or JUMPER LOSS. Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Step 8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for all remaining cables and jumpers. Step 9. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer back to the Test Setup section of these procedures). Perform steps 1 8 until all cables have been successfully tested at the frequencies shown in Table C5. Test Procedure For RF Cables Already Run Up the Tower Step 1. Ensure calibration of the test setup has been performed each time the test frequency is Step 2. changed. If present, remove the barrel connector from between the Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer cables. Step 3. Have a member of the tower crew, positioned at the upper end of the cables on the tower, connect the calibration cable to antenna cable 1 with a barrel connector. Step 4. At the lower end of the RF cables, connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the calibration cable. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 5. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to antenna cable 1. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 6. Calculate the marker using the following formula: (the length of BOTH the calibration cable and the antenna cable) x (loss per foot at the RFS center frequency for the type of cable used). Step 7. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure C5. 140 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure C5: Insertion Loss (Cables on Tower) Marker Measurement Example Step 8. The result should be within +/- 0.5 dB of the calculated value. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the cable connectors for proper connection to the cable, and check for kinks in the cable. If the Spectrum Analyzer has a distance to fault (DTF) function, this can be used to help troubleshoot kinks in the cable. Step 9. Divide this value in half and assign the result to the calibration cable and to the antenna cable. Caution: Cables with results greater than the specified limits (i.e., 2 or 3 dB high) should not be installed, as a potential hardware fault exists. Step 10. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under MAIN FEEDER LOSS. Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Step 11. Repeat steps 3 through 10 for antenna cables 2 through 8. Step 12. When finished, take the average of the eight values obtained for the calibration cable. Use this value for the insertion loss of the calibration cable. Step 13. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer back to Test Setup). Perform steps 1 12 until all cables have been successfully tested at the frequencies given in Table C5. Step 14. Check the value of the nine jumpers at all three frequencies, per the procedure for cables on the ground. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under JUMPER LOSS. Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 141 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. RFS Test Box Setup Step 1. For RFS only testing, connect the power/data test cable to the data connector on the RFS and to the RFS Test Box. OR For RFS and cable testing, connect the installation power/data cable to the data connector on the RFS and to the RFS Test Box. Refer to Figure C6. RFS Test Box RFS Test Box power supply power supply Power/Data cable Power/Data cable connected to the RFS connected to the RFS Step 2. Connect the RFS Test Box power supply to the RFS Test Box. Step 3. Plug the RFS Test Box power supply into a 110 VAC outlet. Figure C6: RFS Only Testing Setup RFS Only Transmit Verification Ensure that the calibration of the test setup and RFS Test Box setup for RFS Only has been performed each time the test frequency is changed. Refer to Figure C7. Step 1. Switch the RFS Test Box to the transmit (Tx) mode. Step 2. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the RFS cal connector. Use a barrel RFS Test Box RFS Test Box connector to change the gender, if required. Step 3. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the RFS antenna input number 1. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. 142 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Barrel connector Barrel connector Figure C7: RFS Only Tx Verification Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer cable to RFS cal cable to RFS cal connector connector Signal Generator Signal Generator cable to RFS cable to RFS antenna 1 connector antenna 1 connector Note: The position of the RFS will vary the sweep results due to reflections from the test surface. Step 4. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure C8. Figure C8: RFS Only Tx Marker Measurement Example Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 143 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 5. The marker value should be equal to the RFS Only Tx insertion loss within +/- 2.0 dB, per the manufacturers data. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the test setup. Caution: An RFS with results greater than the +/- 2.0 dB limits should not be installed, as a potential hardware fault exists. Contact Navini Networks Technical Support. Step 6. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY). Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number of the RFS antenna that is being tested. Step 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the remaining seven antenna inputs on the RFS. Step 8. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer back to Test Setup). Perform steps 1 8 until the RFS has been successfully tested at the frequencies shown in Table C5. RFS Only Receive Verification Step 1. Ensure calibration of the test setup and RFS Test Box setup for RFS Only has been performed each time the test frequency is changed. Step 2. Switch the RFS Test Box to the Receive (Rx) mode. Step 3. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the RFS cal connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 4. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the RFS antenna input number 1. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. See Figure C9. Signal Generator Signal Generator cable to RFS cal cable to RFS cal connector connector Figure C9: RFS Only Rx Verification Barrel connector Barrel connector Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer cable to RFS antenna cable to RFS antenna 1 connector 1 connector 144 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Note: The position of the RFS will vary the sweep results due to reflections from the test surface. Step 5. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure C10. Figure C10: RFS Only Rx Marker Measurement Example Step 6. The marker value should be equal to the RFS Only Rx insertion loss within +/- 2.0 dB, per the manufacturers data. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the test setup. Caution: An RFS with results greater than the +/- 2.0 dB limits should not be installed, as a potential hardware fault exists. Contact Navini Networks Technical Support. Step 7. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY). Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the RFS antenna that is being tested. Step 8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the remaining seven antenna inputs on the RFS. Step 9. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer back to Test Setup). Perform steps 1 8 until the RFS has been successfully tested at the frequencies shown in Table C5. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 145 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. RFS & Cables Transmit Verification This test is performed after the RFS is installed and the antenna cables, calibration cable, and power/data cable are connected to the inputs on the RFS. Step 1. Ensure calibration of the test setup and RFS Test Box setup for RFS and cables has been performed each time the test frequency is changed. Step 2. Switch the RFS Test Box to the Transmit (Tx) mode. Step 3. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the RFS calibration cable connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 4. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the RFS antenna cable number 1 connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 5. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure C11. Figure C11: RFS & Cables Tx Marker Measurement Example Step 6. The marker value should be equal to the RFS Only Tx insertion loss + calibration cable loss + antenna cable loss + antenna cable jumper loss. Transmit insertion loss should be within +/- 2.0 dB of the sum of the parts. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the test setup and the cable connections. 146 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Caution: If RFS & cables test results are greater than the +/- 2.0 dB limits, they should not be installed on a tower, as a potential hardware fault exists. Verify the connections and contact Navini Networks Technical Support. Step 7. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under TOTAL TX PATH LOSS
(CABLE-RFS). Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Step 8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the remaining seven antenna cable inputs on the RFS. Step 9. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer to Test Setup). Perform steps 1-8 until the RFS has been successfully tested at the frequencies shown in Table C5. RFS & Cables Receive Verification This test is performed after the RFS is installed and the antenna cables, calibration cable, and power/data cable are connected to the inputs on the RFS. Step 1. Ensure that the calibration of the test setup and RFS Test Box setup for RFS and cables has been performed each time the test frequency is changed. Step 2. Switch the RFS Test Box to the Receive (Rx) mode. Step 3. If present, remove the barrel connector from between the Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer cables. Step 4. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the RFS calibration cable connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 5. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the RFS antenna cable number 1 connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 6. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure C12. Figure C12: RFS & Cables Rx Marker Measurement Example Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 147 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 7. The marker value should be equal to the RFS Only RX Insertion Loss + Calibration Cable Loss + Antenna Cable Loss + Antenna Cable Jumper Loss. RX Insertion Loss should be within +/- 2.0 dB of the sum of the parts. If the Insertion Loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the test setup and the cable connections. Caution: If RFS & cables test results are greater than the +/- 2.0 dB limits, they should not be installed on a tower, as a potential hardware fault exists. Verify connections and contact Navini Networks Technical Support. Step 8. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under TOTAL RX PATH LOSS
(CABLE-RFS). Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Step 9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for the remaining seven antenna cable inputs on the RFS. Step 10. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer to Test Setup). Perform steps 1-9 until the RFS has been successfully tested at the frequencies given in Table C5. 148 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide 2.4 RFS System Test Form 2.4 GHz RFS INSTALL TEST RESULT FORM RFS SN NAME DATE 2400MHz
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
2440MHz
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
2473MHz
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
AVERAGE
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 CAL CAL CAL MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 149 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 2.6 RFS System Test Form 2.6 GHz RFS INSTALL TEST RESULT FORM RFS SN NAME DATE
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
AVERAGE
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00 MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 CAL CAL CAL 150 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix D: Base Station Installation Certification COMPANY SITE NAME SITE NO LOCATION BASE STATION INSTALLATION CHECKLIST 40-00092-00 SITE TYPE ANTENNA TYPE FREQUENCY BAND BTS ENCLOSURE MONOPOLE OMNI 2.4GHz INDOOR CO-LOCATE SECTORIZED 2.6GHz OUTDOOR OTHER OTHER Equipment Installed in Building A 1 Equipment Installed and Secured Per Plan 2 Roof/Ceiling/Wall Penetrations Patched, Sealed and Painted 3 Penetration(s) Inspected by Landowner Representative Equipment Installed on Roof B 1 Equipment Installed and Secured Per Plan 2 Structural Upgrades to Roof Installed Per Plan 3 Equipment Support Frame Installed Equipment Installed on Grade C 1 Equipment Installed and Secured Per Plan 2 Special Inspection for Foundation Steel Complete 3 Concrete Placed and Vibrated 4 Concrete Break Test Report Complete Civil/Site Work D 1 Fencing Complete (Tie-In to Ground System) Per Plan 2 Gravel/Crushed Rock Placed over Weed Barrier 3 Above Ground Conduits Installed Plumb 4 Landscaping/ Erosion Control Complete Per Plan 5 Access Road Complete Per Plan 6 All Trash and Debris Hauled Off Site 7 Site Area restored to Original Condition 8 Unistruts, iron angles and Rods properly cold galvanized 9 RF Safety Signage Installed where Required Monopole/Tower E 1 Monopole/Tower Plumb, Torqued and Free of Visible Defects 2 Orientation of Monopole/Tower Per Plan 3 Safety Climb Installed and Tensioned per Manufacturer Spec. 4 Weep Hole Free of Obstructions 5 Step Bolts Installed/ Removed Below 30 feet 6 Monopole/Tower Tie-In to Ground Ring Complete YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 151 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Grounding F 1 Monopole/Tower Grounding Installed 2 Ground Wire Types and Size meet construction Specs 3 Lightning Rod Provided and Installed Per Plan 4 5 Ohm Megger Ground Resistance Test Complete 5 Buss Bars Installed Per Plan 6 Surge Protector Installed Between RFS Antenna and Cable 7 Coax Ground Kits Installed at RFS Antenna Per Plan 8 Coax Ground Kits Installed at Tower Base Per Plan 9 Coax Ground Kits Installed at Buss Bar Prior to BTS Per Plan 10 Double Lug Connectors Used at All Buss Bar Attachments 11 Cable Tray/Ice Bridge Bonded and Grounded to Buss Bar 12 Surge Protectors Mounted and Secured on ground Buss Bar 13 Master Ground Buss Bar Tied-In to Ground Ring 14 Equipment Rack Ground Per Plan 15 Power Supply/UPS, Rectifier Ground Per Plan 16 Meter and Telco box Ground Per Plan 17 Fence Work Grounded Per Plan 18 Additional Equipment Tied-In to BTS properly Grounded Electrical, Telco and Network G 1 Power and Telco Conduits Installed Per Plan 2 Conduits Are Labeled and Pull Strings are Provided 3 Meter and Telco Box are Installed Per Plan 4 Circuit Breakers Installed and Properly Labeled 5 UPS Installed and All Internal Connections Made 6 Rectifier Installed, Output and Wiring to BTS Checked 7 Telco Tie-In to Source, Tested and Complete 8 Network/Telco Tie-In to BTS, Tested and Complete 9 EMS Installed and Connected to Network BTS System H 1 Cabinet is Positioned, Secured and Leveled Per Plan 2 Cabinet Outer Surfaces Free from scratches, dents, corrosion 3 All Hardware Connections within BTS are tightened/secured 4 RF/GPS Coax Connectors Securely Connected to BTS 5 Signal/Power Cable Securely Connected to BTS 6 Ethernet/T1 cables Dressed and Secured to BTS 7 Documents, License are Stored or Posted on BTS YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 152 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Antenna and Feeder System J 1 RFS Antenna Height and Orientation Per Plan 2 RFS Antenna Mount Plumb Per Axis 3 GPS Antenna Mounted Per Plan 4 Zinc Cold Galvanizing compound used everywhere 5 Coaxial Cables Run Straight (Not Exceeding Bend Radius) 6 Coaxial Cables Tagged and Color Coded Per Plan 7 Connectors and Jumpers Installed and Weatherproofed 8 Cable Hangers, Bands or Ties Spaced up every 3 Feet 9 Antenna Power and Data Cable Continuity Tested 10 Antenna System Sweep Test Performed and Passed 11 SW and Hard Copy of Antenna Sweep Test Results Provided YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A NOTES Printed Name Signature / Date Company Phone No. Printed Name Signature / Date Company Phone No. Printed Name Signature / Date Company Phone No. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 153 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Appendix E: Configuration Forms The configuration forms are used to plan and design the operating parameters for the system. The parameters for every system element are defined in the EMS Server. BTS Configuration Form Company:_________________________________________________________ Your Name:______________________________________ Date:____________ BTS ID/NAME:____________________________________________________ NOTE 1: Field Values in gray rows indicate data that ordinarily should not be changed or that is populated automatically by the system. NOTE 2: Default Field Values are underlined. General Parameters Field Name RF Admin Status Values Up or Down Connected Status True or False Provisioned Status Provisioned or Unprovisioned Status Description Determines if the BTS is transmitting Radio Frequency
(RF). Up means transmitting. Down means not transmitting. To bring the RF Admin Status Up, execute the Enable action. To bring it Down, execute the Disable action. Display only. The user cannot set this field. Indicates if the EMS can communicate with the BTS. The EMS Server sends a message to the BTS periodically. If the BTS responds, the EMS sets this field to True. If the BTS does not respond in a reasonable amount of time, the EMS changes the Connected Status to false. If the Connected Status is False, the EMS will not send any configuration messages to the BTS because it cannot communicate. If Provisioned, the BTS has been configured and is ready for use. 154 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Values Field Name BTS IP Address EMS Server IP Address BTS Default Gateway BTS Subnet Mask Street Address City State Zip BTS ID BTS Name Suppress Alarms TRUE or FALSE Suppress CPE Registration TRUE or FALSE Calibration Interval
(hours) Bridge Aging Timer
(minutes) 1 - 24 1 - 60 Enable PVC Loopback TRUE or FALSE BTS Contact Personnel BTS Configuration Source EMS or BTS Interface Type BTS Profile Type Frequency Ethernet or ATM Unlicensed 2.4 GHz MMDS 2.6 GHz 2.305 GHz - 2.359 GHz 2.40 GHz - 2.473 GHz 2.50 GHz - 2.595 GHz IP Description Unique IP address for each BTS. Space bar used to remove or skip existing digits. Unique IP address for an EMS. Defaults to the IP on which the EMS Server is running. Space bar used to remove or skip existing digits. Default Gateway used to route IP packets for a BTS. Subnet Mask used to route IP packets for a BTS. Physical location of this BTS. City in which BTS is located. State in which BTS is located. Zip code for location in which BTS is located Unique numeric identification number for this BTS. Cannot be changed once the BTS is created in the system. Unique name given to this BTS. No two BTSs can have the same name. To suppress alarms from BTS to EMS, set to TRUE until problem is resolved. Useful if BTS is flooding EMS and affecting its performance. To allow alarms to be sent, set to FALSE. Determines if BTS can send CPE Registration messages to EMS. Useful if BTS is flooding EMS and affecting its performance. To allow messages to be sent, set to FALSE. The interval of hours by which on-line calibration occurs. BTS Bridge Table timer that controls how long a PVC is assigned to an EID (CPE). The PVC to EID association is removed when no user traffic is received for the timer interval. Applicable only when dynamic PVC assignment is used. Determines if any PVC on this BTS can perform loopback test. Textual identification of a contact person for this BTS and how to contact them. Determines where the BTS obtains its configuration data when reset. If provisioning BTS for first time, set to EMS. After successful reset, defaults to BTS. Indicates the backhaul to which the BTS is connected. Select the correct system. 2.4 GHz is the only unlicensed frequency. Any other system, 2.3, 2.5, and 2.6, select MMDS. Scroll bar that allows you to set the center frequency for the BTS operation. The range depends on the type of system, i.e., 2.3 GHz, 2.4 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.6 GHz. The field is operated by clicking on the center frequency scroll bar and moving it left or right. The center frequency of an MMDS band BTS must match what is hard-wired on the RFS. During installation, the installers should check that the configured center frequency is identical to the center frequency labeled on the Channel Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 155 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 2.602 - 2.686 GHz Filter component of the RFS. CAUTION: Changing an MMDS BTS center frequency may result in destruction of the PAs. Diagnostics Description Determines if the BTS Constellation Display application can be logged into and used on this BTS. If set to True, this BTS can be logged into and its Constellation Display viewed. The maximum number of CPEs that can be viewed simultaneously using the BTS Beamforming diagnostic display. Authorized user of all diagnostic tools. The password used to authenticate the login to all diagnostic tools. Determines if the BTS Spectrum Analyzer (frequency) application can be logged into and used on this BTS. Confirms that the correct password is entered. Performance Values Description IP address of the performance log collection server. Field Name Enable Const Display Values True or False Max Beamform Displays 0-9 ems True or False User Name Password Enable Spec Analyzer Display Confirm Password Field Name Perf Log Server IP Address Perf Log Storage Directory The name of the directory at the Performance Log server where the performance logs are to be sent. Note: The location of the log directory is <ftp root directory>/<pm data directory>. Example: If the FTP root directory is set to d:/naviniems/ftp and the pm data directory is set to performance, the location of the log directory will be d:/naviniems/ftp/performance. Therefore, when configuring the FTP Daemon, set the FTP root directory to <ems install directory>/ftp. The interval that the BTS uploads performance data to the EMS. The interval that the BTS collects the performance logs. The FTP user name set in the FTP Daemon running on the server where performance logs are captured. The FTP password set in the FTP Daemon running on the server capturing performance logs. Re-enter password to confirm authorized access. Upload Interval (minutes or hours) Collection Interval
(minutes or hours) Perf Log FTP User Name Perf Log FTP Password Confirm Password Disable, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, etc. Disable, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour 156 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Field Name GPS Latitude GPS Longitude GPS Height (cm) GPS Gmt Offset (min) Values North or South 0 (deg) 0 (min) 0 (sec) East or West 0 (deg) 0 (min) 0 (sec) 0
-360 GPS Description The latitude of the BTS in degrees, minutes, and seconds. The longitude of the BTS in degrees, minutes, and seconds. The height of the BTS in centimeters. The difference in time (minutes) between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), which is zero, and the time zone where the BTS is located. For example, if the BTS is located in Dallas, Texas, the local time is 6 hours earlier than GMT. In this example, you would enter -360, which is 6 hrs x 60 mins. If the local time is ahead of GMT, you would enter a + in front of the number. Neighbor BTS Frequency List Field Name Center Frequency (Scroll Bar) Colocated Values 2.305 GHz - 2.359 GHz 2.40 GHz - 2.473 GHz 2.50 GHz - 2.595 GHz 2.602 - 2.686 GHz Checkmark or blank Description The frequency at which the neighboring BTS is transmitting. Click to place a checkmark indicating that the neighboring BTS is located on the same tower as the current BTS. CPE Ping Table Field Name Ping Sequence Ip Address Display String Values 0, 1, 2, 3, etc. Alphanumeric (up to 30 characters) Description Order in which the element with this IP address is pinged. IP address of the element being added to the Ping Table. User-assigned designation (name/string) for this element. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 157 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Air Interface Parameters Layer 1 - General Field Name RFS Gps Offset Values Active or Passive 0 Sync Scale Acc Scale Tcc Scale Max Scale Rx Sensitivity (-
dBm) Antenna Power
(dBm) Cal Cable Loss (dB) Cal Backplane Loss
(dB) Cal Total Loss (dB) Synthesizer Tx Gain Synthesizer Rx Gain Synthesizer Sc Gain Synthesizer Level 0.1125 0.0557 0.0197 0.2516 100.0 30.0 0.0 5.0 0.0 Description Specifies whether the RFS has active or passive circuitry. This is the GPS timing offset to apply to the BTS in order of chips (2.5us). The GPS offset must be different for each BTS sharing the same frequency so they do not interfere with each other. The scale setting applied to the transmitted synchronization signal. The scale setting applied to the Access Channel. The scale setting applied to the Traffic Channel. The maximum allowable scale setting for each of the above scales: Sync, ACC, TCC. The target Receiver sensitivity for each antenna. This target is used during full calibration. If it is changed, full calibration must be performed for it to take effect. The target antenna power for each antenna. This target is used during full calibration. Entered in the EMS during commissioning as one of several inputs for performing full calibration. This value is the measured calibration cable loss. If it is changed, full calibration must be performed for it to take effect. Calibration Backplane Loss (dB) Displays the total calibration loss, calculated from the values in Cal Cable Loss and Cal Backplane Loss fields. Displays the Transmitter gain setting for the Synthesizer used during calibration. This field is a result that is automatically returned from full calibration. Displays the Receiver gain setting for the Synthesizer used during calibration. This field is a result that is automatically returned from full calibration. Displays the Loopback gain setting for the Synthesizer used during calibration. This field is a result that is automatically returned from full calibration. Displays the power level of the Synthesizer. 158 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Layer 1 - Antenna Table Field Name Antenna Index Admin Status Power Splitter_I Power Splitter_Q Values 1-8 Up or Down RF Tx Gain RF Rx Gain 0-255 0-255 Description The number of the antenna (1-8) that maps to a specific antenna element in the RFS. Determines if the antenna is transmitting RF. Up means transmitting; Down means not transmitting. The real element of the calibrator board characteristics that is found in the RFS. This information captures the loss and phase information of the board. The Power Splitter data is unique to each RFS. An RFS Configuration CD ships with the equipment. It provides an RFS script and instructions for selecting the correct value to match the specific RFS that is physically installed with the BTS. The imaginary element of the calibrator board that is found in the RFS. This information captures the loss &
amplitude information of the board. The Power Splitter data is unique to each RFS. An RFS Configuration CD ships with the equipment. It provides an RFS script and instructions for selecting the correct value to match the specific RFS that is physically installed with the BTS. The Transmit gains for each antenna element, ranging from 0-255, with 0 being the lowest gain. This data is returned as a result of full calibration. The Receive gains for each antenna element, ranging from 0-255, with 0 being the lowest gain. This data is returned as a result of full calibration. Layer 1 - w0 Table Values Field Name Sub Carrier Id Antenna Index W0 Weight_I W0 Weight_Q 1-5 1-8 Description The subcarrier number. Subcarriers are assigned in pairs. The number of the antenna element. Real elements of the vector used to control ACC spatial pattern. Imaginary elements of the vector used to control ACC spatial pattern. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 159 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Layer 1 - Calibration Table Values Field Name Sub Carrier Id Antenna Index Tx Weight_I Tx Weight_Q Rx Weight_I Rx Weight_Q 1-10 1-8 Description The subcarrier number. The number of the antenna element. Real elements of the vector used while transmitting to control ACC spatial pattern. This data is returned as a result of any of the calibration modes. Imaginary elements of the vector used while transmitting to control ACC spatial pattern. This data is returned as a result of any of the calibration modes. Real elements of the vector used during Receive to control ACC spatial pattern. This data is returned as a result of any of the calibration modes. Imaginary elements of the vector used during Receive to control ACC spatial pattern. This data is returned as a result of any of the calibration modes. Layer 2 - Carrier Data Field Name Sub Carrier Number
/ Sub Carrier Values 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 9-10 Access Channel Checkmark or blank Broadcast Channel Checkmark or blank TDD Symmetry Ratio Symmetric or Asymmetric Repeat Uplink Pkts Frequency
(Scroll Bar) Checkmark or blank 2.305 GHz - 2.359 GHz 2.40 GHz - 2.473 GHz 2.50 GHz - 2.595 GHz 2.602 - 2.686 GHz Description These two fields identify the 10 subcarriers. You can click on the pair of subcarriers to be enabled for this BTS. Subcarriers are assigned in pairs, one for uplink and one for downlink. Access Code Channels: The ACC Channel occupies the Code Channel with Walsh Index 0 configured on a specified subcarrier frequency. Each checkbox indicates which pair of subcarriers is used for the Access Channel(s). Broadcast Code Channel: If the box is checked, then this channel is used to broadcast BTS related information. If left blank, then information is broadcast on the ACC channel. Symmetric Ratio is 1:1. Asymmetric Ratio is 1:3. This parameter determines the variable uplink and downlink ratio in a TDD frame. If set to Asymmetric, the downlink will have 3 times more bandwidth than the uplink. This is sometimes desired due to the types of users on the system, i.e., downloading files off the Internet. If the box is checked, this carrier will repeat uplink packets. Indicates the center frequency of the BTS transmit signal. 160 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Layer 2 - Bandwidth Field Name Underload Threshold
(%) Values 80%
Overload Threshold (%) 85%
Positive Access Overload Threshold (%) Negative Access Overload Threshold (%) 90%
95%
Reserved Channels for Accesses CPE Inactive Time (min) 15 12 Bandwidth Adjust Interval (10ms) Realtime Session Hold Time (10ms) Non-realtime Session Hold Time (10ms) 20 250 250 Non RT PreRelease BW
(Kbps) 0 - 2,048 Default is 32 Denied Req Number 5 Average LCC Q LEN Factor Exponential For Average 1 Average Burst Time (ms) 50 2 Max Bts Power (TCC Power) DL ACC Power Per Channel (TCC Power) TCC Initial Setup Power
(%) Average Exponential Factor TCC Power per Channel Range (dB) Min Realtime Data Bandwidth (Kbps) 320 8 25%
1 19 0 - 2,048 Default is 32 Description The threshold crossing in which a BTS changes its load congestion state from Overload (either Positive Access Overload or Negative Access Overload) to Underload. The threshold crossing in which a BTS changes its load congestion state from Underload to Positive Access Overload. The threshold crossing in which a BTS changes its load congestion state from Negative Access Overload to Positive Access Overload. The threshold crossing in which a BTS changes its load congestion state from either Underload or Positive Access Overload. Number of channels reserved for access when in the Underload state. When a CPE has not communicated with a BTS for the set Inactive Time, the status of the CPE changes from active to inactive, as expressed in minutes. A users bandwidth (uplink or downlink) is adjusted every Adjust Time if needed when on TCC. Expressed in units of 10 milliseconds. The length of time a user with realtime data holds RF resources after the incoming packet queue is empty. Expressed in units of 10 milliseconds. The length of time a user with non-realtime data holds RF resources after the incoming packet queue is empty. Expressed in units of 10 milliseconds. The bandwidth a user is assigned while in Non-realtime Session Hold Time. The Non RT PreRelease BW is in units of MAC packets. The number of consecutive times a users access request fails due to lack of RF resources before access is denied. Factor used to determine the average LLC queue length. Average exponent for all statistical variables but power. Average time for a data burst, expressed in units of 10 milliseconds. Maximum RF power a BTS has. It is in units of maximum TCC power per channel. This field is not configurable. Downlink ACC RF power per channel. It is expressed in units of maximum TCC power per channel. Initial setup power of a TCC channel. Expressed in units of the percentage of the max. TCC power per channel. Average exponent for average power. Number of decibels the downlink TCC power per channel can vary. The minimum bandwidth a user with realtime data holds that is not used for acknowledgement. Expressed in units of MAC packets (data rate). Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 161 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Supported Modulations Total Priority Level Num. Max Bandwidth for Priority 1-8 (%) QAM4 QAM4 QAM8 QAM4 QAM16 QAM4 QAM8 QAM16 8 1 default 85%
2 default 10%
3 default 5%
4-8 default 0%
The highest QAM Rank the BTS can process. The total number of QoS classes the BTS can maintain. Each class is associated with a priority. The percentage of the total bandwidth a QoS class associated with a certain priority is entitled to. Layer 2 - WAN Congestion Control Field Name Average Queue Size Weight (%) Values 100.0 Max Queue Size (KB) 512 Min to Max Drop Probability (%) Realtime Min Drop Threshold (%) 10 100 High Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Low Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Description For downlink, this value - expressed as a percentage -
indicates how much the current queue size contributes to the calculation of the average queue size. The average queue size is used by the BTS Resource Management software to determine how many resources (Code Channels) to give a CPE. The greater the weight, the greater influence the current queue size has on the average queue size. The lower the weight, the more the queue size is an actual average of the current queue size over time. For downlink, the maximum queue size - in kilobytes -
for each priority queue (high, low, voice). Once the queue is full (at Min Drop Threshold) all packets are dropped. For downlink, the probability of a packet being dropped when the Min Threshold has been reached. The higher this number, the more likely a packet will be dropped between the Min Threshold and the Max Threshold. NOTE: All packets are dropped at the Max Threshold. For downlink, the minimum queue size in which voice priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, voice priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. For downlink, the minimum queue size in which high priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, high priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. For downlink, the minimum queue size in which low priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, high priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. 162 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Layer 2 - CPE Uplink Congestion Control Field Name Avg Queue Size Weight
(%) Values 100.0 Max Queue Size (KB) 512 Min to Max Drop Probability (%) Realtime Min Drop Threshold (%) 10 100 High Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Low Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Description For the uplink, this value - expressed as a percentage -
indicates how much the current queue size contributes to the calculation of average queue size. The average queue size is used by the BTS Resource Management software to determine how many resources (Code Channels) to give a CPE. The greater the weight, the greater influence the current queue size has on the average queue size. The lower the weight, the more the average queue size is an actual average of the current queue size over time. For the uplink, the maximum queue size for each priority queue (high, low, voice). Once the queue is full (at Min Drop Threshold) all packets are dropped. For the uplink, the probability of a packet being dropped when the Min threshold has been reached. The higher this number, the more likely a packet will be dropped between the Min Threshold and Max Threshold. Note:
All packets are dropped at the Max Threshold. For the uplink, the minimum queue size in which voice priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10% once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, voice priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. For the uplink, the minimum queue size in which high priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10% once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, high priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. For the uplink, the minimum queue size in which low priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10% once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, low priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 163 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Backhaul Interface Parameters T1 Field Name Admin Status Values Up Line Type Send Code Signal Mode Line Length (foot) Fdl ESF or D4 Send line code, Send No Code, Send Payload Code, Send Reset Code None 5000 None, Att54016, AnsiT1403 Line Status Change Trap Enabled or Disabled Line Index Line Coding Circuit Identifier Transmit Clock Source Channelization 1 B8ZS or AMI Loop timing or Local Timing Disabled Description Up or Down. Display only. The administrative
(operational) status of this T1. If Down, no traffic is able to go through this interface. This field is not configurable. Framing format Selection of codes used for far-end loopback tests Always None Length of T1 cables from BTS to terminating equipment Facility Data Link (FDL) signaling type Enables generation of traps based on changes to the line status The ATM IF index that this T1 is associated with Type of coding used to encode bits on the line Transmission vendors circuit identifier Source of the framer Transmit clock Always Disabled (clear channel) IMA Groups Field Name Admin Status Symmetry Values Up Symmetric operation, Symmetric &
Asymmetric, or Asymmetric Min Num Rx Links Tx Ima Id Alpha Value 3 0 2 Description Up or Down. This is the administration (operational) status of the IMA group. If Down, no traffic is able to go through this interface. Three options for the relationship of the Transmit and Receive link throughput:
Symmetric operation - all links should be configured in both directions. Tx and Rx must both be active to use the disk.
Symmetric and Asymmetric operation - all links should be configured in both directions. Transmitting is allowed when Tx is active and Rx is not active.
Asymmetric operation - not required to configure the IMA links in both Tx and Rx directions. Minimum number of active Receive links that is necessary for the IMA group to be active. Near-end (Transmit) IMA ID. Used to specify the number of consecutive valid ICP cells to be detected before moving to the IMA hunt state from the IMA sync state. 164 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Gamma Value 1 Index IMA group 2 Min Num Tx Links 1 Ne Tx Clk Mode Tx Frame Length Beta Value ITC M128 2 Used to specify the number of consecutive valid ICP cells to be detected before moving to the IMA sync state from the IMA pre-sync state. IMA Group 1 or 2. Unique sequence number of the IMA group. Minimum number of Transmission links that have to be active for the IMA group to be active. Near-end Transmit clock mode. Length of IMA frame being transmitted. It is defined as M consecutive cells. Used to specify the number of consecutive ICP cells with errors to be detected before moving to the IMA hunt state from the IMA sync state. Add T1s to IMA Groups IMA Group IMA 1 IMA 2 T1s Associated With this IMA Group Notes Field Name If Index Max Vccs Max Active Vci Bits Values T1-1 (first T1 ID) 1001 9 Max Vpcs Max Active Vpi Bits 0 3 ATM Description Interface (IF) Index associated with this ATM interface. Maximum Virtual Channel Circuits for this interface. The number of bits for Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). Determines the maximum VCI value allowed for this interface. The Max Value is calculated by 2^ (max active vci bits). Maximum Virtual Private Circuits for this interface. The number of bits for Virtual Private Identifier. Determines the maximum VPI value allowed for this interface. The max value is calculated by 2^ (max active vpi bits). PVC Values Field Name if Index Vpi (start and end) Vci (start and end) Tr/Re Traffic Descr Indexes AAL5 CPCS Tx SDU Size (Byte) T1-1 0 0 2 1528 Description The ATM IF index that this PVC is associated with. Virtual Path Identifier. The VPI + VCI are in the cell header and identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches. Virtual Channel Identifier. The VPI + VCI are in the cell header and identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches. Index of the ATM Descriptor that applies to this PVC. The Transmit and Receive Descriptors are the same. The maximum AAL5 CPCS SDU size, in bytes, that is supported in the Transmit direction. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 165 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. AAL5 CPCS Rx SDU Size (Byte) Admin Status 1528 Up AAL Type AAL5 (1-5) AAL5 Encap Type LLC encapsulation Cast Type Conn Kind P2P PVC The maximum AAL5 CPCS SDU size, in bytes, that is supported in the Receive direction. Up or Down. The administrative (operational) state of the PVC. If it is Down, this PVC may not be used for traffic. The type of ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) used on this PVC: AAL1, AAL2, AAL3, AAL4, or AAL5. The type of data encapsulation used over the AAL5 SSCS layer. The connection topology type. The type of VCL. This is always PVC. Assign CPE to PVC Field Name PVC CPE Data Values T1-1-1-100 (example) 0 Description Identifies the PVC to be assigned to the specified CPE. CPE assigned to specified PVC. Denotes what type of PVC to assign.
CPE Configuration Data Form Company:__________________________________________________________ Your Name:______________________________________Date:______________ NOTE 1: Field Values in gray rows indicate data that ordinarily should not be changed or that is populated automatically by the system. NOTE 2: Default Field Values are underlined. Add CPE Field Name EID (hex) Values 0 Descriptor Name CPE Descriptor-1 Collect Perf Data True Nomadic Disabled Description Equipment Identifier unique to each CPE. This value is determined during the manufacturing process and is displayed on the case of the CPE hardware, as well as entered and displayed as a hexadecimal number in this field. The name of the CPE Descriptor to be used with this CPE. The CPE Descriptor level affects Quality-of-
Service (QoS) for this CPEs data packets. True or False. Collect Performance Data. If True, this CPE sends performance metrics to the BTS at the set interval. The BTS then uploads the performance data to the EMS at set intervals. The interval setting for collection and upload from the BTS to the EMS is set in the Performance fields for the BTS. Enabled or Disabled. If Enabled, this CPE can access any BTS in the network that is defined in its Available Home 166 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Admin Status Active BTS list at the bottom of the screen. When enabled, the Current Home BTS list is ignored. If disabled, this CPE can only access a BTS in its Available Home BTS list. Active or Suspended. If suspended, the CPE cannot access any BTS. A Service Provider may decide to make the CPE suspended due to late service payments, security concerns, etc., rather than deleting the CPE from the system database. Home BTS Field Name Available Home BTS Current Home BTS Values Description Add or Remove BTS Names. A list of available BTSs to include in the Current Home BTS list for this CPE. Add or Remove BTS Names. If Nomadic is disabled, these are the only BTSs this CPE can access. If Nomadic is enabled, this list is ignored. Layer 3 Field Name Ingress Acl Values
(Checkbox) Ingress Broadcast
(Checkbox) Description If checkbox is clicked on any incoming packet whose MAC address cannot be found in the current CPE Authenticated IP List will be discarded. If checkbox is clicked on any incoming MAC broadcast message will be discarded. DHCP Relay Field Name Free Address High Drop Policy Max Address Number Values Drop most recently leased or Drop least recently leased Drop most recently leased or Drop least recently leased Description Drop the most recently leased or least recently leased IP addresses Drop the most recently leased or least recently leased IP addresses IP Address Field Name Static Client IP Address 0.0.0.0 Values Hardware Address 0:0:0:0:0:0 Description Use static, rather than dynamic, IP addressing for this device. If static IP assignment is being made, add this IP address to the Ingress Filter Authenticated IP List. Otherwise, leave zeroes. Enter the Ethernet address of the host computer to which the CPE is connected and that corresponds to the above Client IP Address. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 167 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc.
EMS Configuration Data Form
(To configure EMS Servers & Clients in the Ripwave System) Company:__________________________________________________________ Your Name:______________________________________ Date:_____________ NOTE 1: Field Values in gray rows indicate data that ordinarily should not be changed or that is populated automatically by the system. NOTE 2: Default Field Values are underlined. Field Name EMS Id Alarm AutoAck Values True Server Ip Address Database Schema Version Mib Version 01 (example) 1.19.01 (example) BTS/CPE SW Directory loads (example) FTP Server Root Path Network ID Description Unique identifier for this EMS. True or False. If True, the EMS will automatically acknowledge all alarms except alarms with a severity level of Warning (blue). An Alarm Engineer will only see current alarms on the system. However, all alarm activity is logged to an alarm file. IP address of the EMS Server. Version of the EMS server database schema. Version of the BTS Management Information Base
(MIB). Directory where BTS and CPE software loads are stored. Used by the EMS to obtain the location of the software loads during downloads. Copy BTS and CPE software loads to this directory during initial installations or upgrades. Otherwise, the EMS cannot download the software to the BTS. This field is used in conjunction with the FTP Server Root Path field by the EMS to obtain the software loads. The full path the EMS searches for software loads is <FTP Server Root Path>\<BTS/CPE SW Directory>. Example - C:\naviniems\ftp\loads. The Root directory where BTS and CPE software loads are stored. This field must match what is configured in the FTP Daemon. Otherwise, the EMS will not be able to download BTS and CPE software loads to the BTS. This path is used by the EMS to obtain the location of the software loads during downloads. Copy BTS and CPE software loads to this root directory during initial installations or upgrades. This field is used in conjunction with the BTS/CPE SW Directory field by the EMS to obtain the software loads. The full path the EMS searches for software loads is <FTP Server Root Path>\<BTS/CPE SW Directory>. Example - C:\naviniems\ftp\loads. Unique identifier for this Service Providers wireless network. Intended to ensure other Service Providers CPEs cannot operate in the identified network. A CPE with a different BTS network ID cannot be provided 168 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Server Name EMS Version Idl Build Number 1.19.01 (example) 1.18.09 (example) BTS/CPE SW Ftp User Name BTS/CPE SW Ftp Password Confirm Password CPE AutoProvisioning Disabled service by that BTS. Host name of the EMS Server machine. Version of the EMS Server software. CORBA networking software IDL version used by the EMS Server. User name for downloading BTS and CPE software from the EMS. This field must match what is configured in the FTP Daemon. Otherwise, the EMS cannot download BTS and CPE software loads to the BTS. Password used when downloading BTS and CPE software. This field must match what is configured in the FTP Daemon. Otherwise, the EMS cannot download BTS and CPE software loads to the BTS. Password must be re-entered for security purposes. Enable or Disable. Determines if the EMS is in AutoProvision mode during CPE registration. If enabled, the EMS will allow unprovisioned CPEs to access the system with minimum bandwidth for a short period of time. The minimum bandwidth is defined by the first entry in the CPE Descriptor table. Once the CPE is allowed limited access to the system, it can connect to a default web site to enter billing information and the CPE can be provisioned automatically with the EMS. If disabled, the EMS will NOT allow an unprovisioned CPE to access the system.
Global Parameters Configuration Form Company:__________________________________________________________ Your Name:______________________________________Date:______________ NOTE 1: Field Values in gray rows indicate data that ordinarily should not be changed or that is populated automatically by the system. NOTE 2: Default Field Values are underlined. ATM Descriptor Field Name Index Type Description Identifier for this ATM Descriptor Type of ATM Values 0 NOCLPNOSCR, NOCLPSCR, CLPNOTAGGINGSCR, CLPTAGGINGSCR, CLPNOTAGGINGMCR, CLPTRANSPARENTNOSCR, CLPTRANSPARENTSCR, NOCLPTAGGINGNOSCR Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 169 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Category Frame Discard CBR, RTVBR, NRTVBR, ABR, UBR True Param1 - Param5 CBR Parameters:
PCR RTVBR Parameters:
PCR SCR MBS NRTVBR Parameters:
PCR SCR MBS ABR Parameters:
PCR MCR ICR RDF RIF CDF UBR Parameters:
PCR 0 Category of this ATM (see parameters, below) True or False. If set to True, enables the ability to discard ATM frames. Described below Peak Cell Rate Peak Cell Rate Sustainable Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size Peak Cell Rate Sustainable Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size Peak Cell Rate Minimum Cell Rate Initial Cell Rate Rate Decrease Factor Rate Increase Factor Cutoff Decrease Factor Peak Cell Rate CPE Descriptor Field Name Name Index Priority Values 1 (1-8) 0 UL Max Bandwidth
(Kbps) UL Min Bandwidth
(Kbps) DL Max Bandwidth
(Kbps) DL Min Bandwidth
(Kbps) 0, 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, etc. 0, 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, etc. 0, 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, etc. 0, 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, etc. Avg Queue Size Weight
(%) 100.0 Description Name given to this CPE Descriptor. Unique index identifier for this CPE Descriptor. The priority that a CPE with this assigned Descriptor will receive from the BTS Resource Manager software when requesting RF resources. This field maps to the Layer 2 > Bandwidth Data component in the BTS. Maximum uplink bandwidth allowable for a CPE with this Descriptor. The maximum number of code channels allocated for a CPE is directly related to this field. Minimum uplink bandwidth allowable for a CPE. This field determines the number of code channels allocated when a CPE begins a data session. The larger this value, the more code channels allocated at session startup. Maximum downlink bandwidth allowable for a CPE. The maximum number of code channels allocated for a CPE is directly related to this field. Minimum downlink bandwidth allowable for a CPE. This field determines the number of code channels allocated when a CPE begins a data session. The larger this value, the more code channels allocated at session startup. How much the current queue size contributes to the calculation of average queue size. The average queue size is used by the BTS Resource Manager to determine 170 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Max Queue Size (KB) 512 Min to Max Drop Probability (%) Realtime Min Drop Threshold (%) 10 100 High Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Low Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 how many resources (code channels) to give a CPE. The greater the weight, the greater influence the current queue size has on the average queue size. The lower the weight, the more the average queue size is an actual average of the current queue size over time. Maximum queue size for each priority queue (high, low, voice). Once full (Max Threshold) all packets are dropped. The probability of a packet being dropped when the Min Threshold has been reached. The higher this number, the more likely a packet will be dropped between the Min and Max Threshold. All packets are dropped at Max Threshold. The minimum queue size at which voice priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10% once the queue size reaches 11% or more, voice priority packets may be dropped. The Max Threshold Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. The minimum queue size which high priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11% or more, high priority packets may be dropped. The Max Threshold Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. The minimum queue size which low priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11% or more, low priority packets may be dropped. The Max Threshold Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. DiffServ Field Name Code Point Values 0 Description Unique index (bit) to be mapped to a defined Differentiated Service. The code point is structured as follows:
0
3
2
1
6
4
5
7 DSCP
CU
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+ Priority Low, High, Voice
Currently Unused DSCP: Differentiated Services Code Point CU: The Type of Service (ToS) bits are included in the DSCP. Low, High, or Voice. This is the priority given to data packets associated with this Code Point/Service. The BTS processes data packets with Voice, then High priority before Low priority packets. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 171
Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Field Name Relay Config Enabled Values
(Checkbox) Free Address Low Agent Threshold Free Address High Agent Threshold Relay Config MaxDhcp Size Option 82 Tagging 80 100 1488
(Checkbox) Remote Id
(Checkbox) Circuit Id
(Checkbox) VPN Id
(Checkbox) Subnet Selection/Addr
(Checkbox) DOCSIS Device/Class
(Checkbox) DHCP Relay Description Enable or Disable. Clicking on the checkbox enables the DHCP Relay feature. Enable or Disable. Clicking on the checkbox enables the inclusion of one or more of the following Relay Information sub-options. If checked (enabled), include the CPEs EID as the Remote ID Relay Information sub-option. It will be formatted as a 6 octet string 0000<EID>. This format is often used in cable modem scenarios. If checked (enabled), include the BTSs ID as the Circuit ID Relay Information sub-option. It will be formatted as a 4-octet string <BTS ID>. This format is often used in cable modem scenarios. If checked (enabled), include the CPEs EID as the VPN ID Relay Information sub-option. It will be formatted as a text string navini<EID>. This format is often used in DSL scenarios. If checked (enabled), include the specified Subnet Address as the Subnet Selection Relay Information sub-
option. If checked (enabled), include the specified DOCSIS Device Class as the DOCSIS Device Relay Information sub-option. ARP Proxy Field Name ARP Ingress Proxy ARP Egress Proxy Values
(Checkbox)
(Checkbox) Description If clicked, this enables the BTS to respond to ARP messages coming from the CPE's/Modems to the BTS. If clicked, this enables the BTS to respond to ARP messages coming from the network (backhaul) to the BTS on behalf of the CPE's/Modems. 172 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Layer 3 Filter Field Name Dynamic Acl Values
(Checkbox) Egress Broadcast Filter
(Checkbox) Description If clicked, this enables the Dynamic Access Control List. It provides the filtering rules for DHCP Relay - where a BTS configured with these capabilities may add learned addresses to the CPEs Authenticated IP List (the CPEs Ingress Filter). When BTSs and CPEs are configured for this feature, any packet whose MAC address cannot be found in the current CPE Authenticated IP List will be discarded. If clicked, this enables configured BTSs to drop all Ethernet Broadcast packets. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 173 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 174 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide A. B. C. D. E. F. Appendix F: Base Station Calibration Verification*
Instructions This procedure and form are created to explain how and what to enter into the Base Station Calibration Verification spreadsheet, as well as define each cells function. The cells that need an entry are shown in green. This procedure and form are to be used in conjunction with the Installation & Commissioning manual. General Information Site Name (D4) - Enter the site name or customer designation. BTS ID (D5) - Enter the BTS identification number or customer description. Date (D6) - Excel will enter the current date. Software Release (D7) - Enter the release number of the software load being used. Personnel (D8) - Enter your name. 2.4 GHz (B12) - Enter an X or some other mark in the appropriate box for the frequency slot that the system will be operating at.**
2.6 GHz (B17-F17) - Enter an X or some other mark in the appropriate box for the frequency slot that the system will be operating at.**
Cal Path Loss (average) (H21) - This is a calculated value determined from the data entered in Section II. Receiver Sensitivity (set in the EMS) (H23) - Enter the same number entered in the EMS under Air Interface > Layer 1 > General tab > Receiver sensitivity. Test Cable Loss (H24) - Enter the loss of the test cable that will be used to connect the signal generator to the calibration cable. Do not try to approximate this value. Measure all test cables before starting any testing. If no additional cable is necessary, enter zero (0). Include the minus sign, as it is a loss. RF Power Injected at Cal Cable to Get Sensitivity at Antenna (H25) - This is a calculated value determined from the values in H21-H24. Antenna Power (in the EMS) (H30) - Enter the same number entered in the EMS under Air Interface > Layer 1 > General tab > Antenna power. Coupler/Test Cable Loss (H31) - Enter the loss of the couplers coupled port plus the test cable that will be used to connect the spectrum analyzer to the BTSs output ports. Do not try to approximate this value. Measure all test items and cables before starting any testing. I. J. K. L. M. G. H. _______________
*Sometimes called the RF Sanity Test. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 175 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc.
**The Ripwave Radio Frequency Sub-system (RFS) is pre-programmed for your specific operating environment. Before configuring the RFS parameters, follow the procedures below.
(Note: These are also found in the Ripwave RFS Configuration Quick Guide). You will need access to the EMS Server console to perform the configuration. Please note that each Configuration disk is unique to the individual RFS that is shipped. You cannot use the same disk on other RFS equipment. Configuration Procedure Step 1. Remove the RFS Configuration disk from the RFS packaging, and insert it in the floppy drive. Step 2. Copy the folder named RFS that is on the disk to the EMS Server: <ems install dir>/scripts. It will take approximately 20 seconds to complete. Step 3. Open the new folder on the EMS server . You will see a list of file names. The format of the file names is as follows:
RFS_serial number_frequency.cli Example: RFS_024300001_2402500.cli - This sample configuration file is for an RFS with serial number 024300001 and a center frequency of 2.4025. Verify the correct serial number in the file name against the serial number of the RFS equipment. The equipment serial number may be found on the back of the RFS panel or on the side of the bottom cylinder of the omni antenna. Step 4. Determine which file you need to run, depending on the provisioned frequency of your BTS. NOTE: For 2.6 GHz systems, select the frequency that is closest to your provisioned center frequency. To find the provisioned center frequency for your BTS, open the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) application. Select the BTS tab and specific BTS, then Air Interface / Layer 2 / Carrier Data / Show Configuration. This will display the center frequency information. Step 5. Open the selected CLI file for editing using any text processing application program. Note the power splitter values listed there (i.e., write them down or print them out). Step 6. Modify the line that starts with bts by changing the BTS ID for your BTS. The default is BTS 1. For example, if the ID for your BTS is 252, change the 1 to 252. 176 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 7. Save this file as text, and then close it. Step 8. Start the EMS CONFIG CLI application to run script <CLI script>. Do this by entering the following:
>enable <user name> <password>
>configure
>script scripts/rfs/rfs_<serial number>_<7-digit frequency>.cli NOTE: For Unix operating systems, the CLI text is case sensitive and the slash marks should be backward slashes instead of forward slashes. Step 9. View the Power Splitter values in EMS to verify that the CLI script ran as expected. The Power Splitter values may be found under Layer 1 / Show Configuration >
Antenna Table. You will need to Refresh the active screen to view the update/changes. Step 10. Type Exit twice to exit CLI edit mode. Cable & RFS Performance Cable Loss (B40-D48) - Enter the values measured during the cable sweeps. Include the minus sign on all entries. Include jumpers and surge protectors. Insertion Loss Through Cal Cable and RFS (C54 - E69) - Enter values measured during the RF sweeps of the cables and the RFS. Include the minus sign for all entries. Cal Path Loss (calculated) (H54-H69) - A calculated value based on absolute loss measured during RF sweeps. The measured cable loss for antenna 1 plus 3dB for inherent loss in the RFS (internal cables and LNA loss) is subtracted from the measured TX path loss to give absolute calibration path loss. It is important to check this value to ensure that it does not exceed -45dB. LNA Gain (calculated) (J55 - L69) - A calculated value based on absolute loss measured during RF sweeps. The absolute value of the difference between TX path loss and RX path loss equals LNA gain for each antenna path. Receiver Performance A. B. C. D. A. Backplane Slot & Pin # (A76-A83) - These are the pin numbers for the baseband output of the two channel processor slots. Only accessible in the Ripwave 2.4 GHz system if the back plate is removed. Only used in extreme situations where access from the front using the CHP test card is not available. Do not use this method in a Ripwave 2.6 GHz system. Damage will occur to the interconnecting RF cables on the channel filters. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 177 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Test CHP Card (D76-D83) - These are the jack identifiers for the CHP test card, which is modified to provide baseband signals to the front panel. Be aware that the order on the card is not sequential from top to bottom. The first (top) jack is channel #4, the second jack is channel #2, the third jack is channel #3, and the last
(bottom) jack is channel #1. Noise Level (mVrms) (F76-F83) - Measured baseband noise level of each channel. This measurement includes noise generated by the BTS (Noise figure) plus ambient noise of the surrounding environment. Noise + Signal (mVrms) (G76-G83) - The signal level measured when a Continuous Wave tone is injected at the calibration cable. Tone amplitude is calculated in cell H25. This is a composite signal including noise. Signal (H76-H83) - The calculated signal level. Noise is subtracted from signal +
noise using the following formula: square root of the signal plus noise level, squared, minus the square of the noise level:
Signal = SQRT ((signal+noise)2 - (noise) 2). SNR = Log10 (signal+noise/noise)*20 Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) (I76-I83) - Calculated value of the signal-to-noise ratio. Determined by the following formula: Log10 of the signal + noise level, divided by the noise level, multiplied by 20. Dividing gives you the ratio. Taking the Log10 of the ratio converts to power. Multiple by 20 to convert to dB:
Noise Power (J76-J83) - Calculated value of the noise power at the baseband input to the Channel Processor. Calculated by adding the signal level injected at the antenna (RX sensitivity) plus the SNR value. Unit of measure is dBm. Relative Noise Figure (K76-K83) - Calculated noise figure of the system. Since the noise level includes thermal and ambient noise in addition to the BTS noise figure, and we have no control over the signal source noise, it is labeled as relative and is then referenced to the thermal noise floor. It is calculated by subtracting the theoretical thermal noise floor (Ktb) (-106 dBm, in a 6 MHz bandwidth) from the noise power calculation. This establishes a noise figure that includes any noise from the signal source as well as the BTS noise figure. RX Gain (DAC Word) (L76-L83) - The hex data generated during calibration for the receiver gain DAC that controls the IF attenuator. It is found in the EMS under Air Interface > Layer 1 > Show Configuration > Antenna tab. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Transmitter Performance A. Analyzer Readings (A90-B97) 1. Peak - The peak amplitude of the sync signal measured on the spectrum analyzer. The measurement is taken with the spectrum analyzer in time domain (0 Hz span) and RBW set for 5 MHz. Sweep time is typically between 10 and 20 ms. When taking the measurement, the sync signal will have peaks and valleys associated with it. Make sure to measure the absolute peak. 178 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide 2. RMS - This is a calculated value based on measurements taken on several occasions, comparing peak power to RMS power on a Rhode & Schwartz spectrum analyzer. It has been determined that the correction factor for peak to average on a standard spectrum analyzer is 9.5dB. This correction factor is the default entry in this section. If it is possible to make the RMS measurement with the proper equipment, then that is the preferred method. The calculation is very straight-forward:
Peak Power minus 9.5dB = Power RMS. P out Transceiver (D90-E97) - Power peak and Power RMS are calculated values using the value from the spectrum analyzer readings and the value entered for coupler/test cable loss. (Cell H31) Power at Antenna (RMS) (G90-G97) - Calculated value using the P out of the transceivers and the Cable Loss plus the inherent loss of the RFS. Radiated Power (RMS) (I90 - I97) - Calculated value using Power at the antenna and the value entered for antenna gain. (Cell H32) TX Gain (DAC Word) - The hex data generated during calibration for the transmit gain DAC that controls the IF attenuator. It is found in the EMS under Air Interface > Layer 1 > Show Configuration > Antenna tab. Max Power Deviation Across All Antennae (E99, G99, I99) - Calculated value showing the deviation between the lowest power antenna and highest power antenna for each column. B. C. D. E. F. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 179 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Calibration Verification Form General information Site Name BTS ID Date Software release Personnel 2.4 GHz MHz Test data #1 9/16/2002 1.13 2.6 GHz E1 E2 E3 F1 F2 Cal path loss (averaged) RX sensitivity (set in EMS) Test cable loss RF power injected at cal cable to get sensitivity at antenna Antenna power (in EMS)=
Coupler/test cable loss =
Antenna gain=
Cable and RFS performance Cable Loss Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cal Low
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 Mid
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 High
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 Avg. loss
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 Data input by user
-33.0
-90.0
-2.0
-55.0 18.0
-22.0 8.0 180 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Insertion loss thru cal cable and RFS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path Low
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0 Mid
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0 High
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0 Average
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0
-42.0
-22.0 Cal path loss
(calculated)
-33.0
-33.0
-33.0
-33.0
-33.0
-33.0
-33.0
-33.0 LNA gain
(calculated) 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 Reciever performance Backplane Slot and pin #
Test CHP card Noise level
(mVrms) Noise +
Signal
(mVrms) Signal SNR Noise Power Relative Noise figure RX Gain
(DAC) word Ant 1 Ant 2 Ant 3 Ant 4 Ant 5 Ant 6 Ant 7 Ant 8 CH-A-2d CH-A-6d CH-A-10d CH-A-14d CH-B-2d CH-B-6d CH-B-10d CH-B-14d Jack A Jack B Jack C Jack D Jack A Jack B Jack C Jack D 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 125.0 125.0 125.0 125.0 125.0 125.0 125.0 125.0 118.4 118.4 118.4 118.4 118.4 118.4 118.4 118.4 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9
-99.9
-99.9
-99.9
-99.9
-99.9
-99.9
-99.9
-99.9 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 Transmitter Performance Analyzer readings Peak RMS 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 Max power deviation across all antennea P out = Power Out P out Transceiver Power
(peak) Power
(RMS) 37.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 0.0 Power at antenna
(RMS) Radiated power
(RMS) TX Gain
(DAC word) 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 0.0 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 0.0 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 181 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 182 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix G: Drive Study Overview The Drive Study is performed to confirm Base Station coverage. It is used to validate that the Base Station can be seen by a CPE throughout its predicted coverage area. The RF coverage analysis displays areas of coverage from good to bad by the use of color-
coding. An RF coverage analysis and its legend may be seen in Figure G1. The legend on the left displays the decibel strength for a given area, with red designating good coverage and white designating bad coverage. The RF coverage analysis is used to map out the Drive Study route
(Figure G2), along with geographic areas of concern. You should pay particular attention to null
(white) areas and the cell edges. Figure G1: RF Coverage Analysis Example Good coverage Good coverage Bad coverage Bad coverage coverage area coverage area Medium Medium area area area area Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 183 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure G2: Drive Study Route Example Equipment Required Omni-directional antenna mounted outside vehicle GPS with serial cable CPE Ethernet Cable CPE power supply DC to AC power converter Laptop computer Drive Study Form <shown later in this section>
Drive Test Procedure While driving you will collect statistics to validate the coverage plot. The application takes a reading every second and records the data in comma delimited file format. It is important to ensure that the GPS is on and that you can see the GPS coordinates in the application. Since the Ripwave system is not a mobile system, do not exceed 10 mph during the Drive Study. Going any faster will negate the adaptive beamforming, as the vehicle will not be in the exact position calculated by the Base Station. 184 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 1. Ensure that the Base Station has successfully completed calibration and RF sanity measurements at the frequency and TX/RX signal levels that were determined during the site survey. Ensure that the Base Station is powered on and able to TX/RX data. Step 2. Create a CPE Descriptor, and assign it to the CPEs to be used for the Drive Study:
CPE Descriptor Parameters Name: Drive Study Index: Next available number Priority: 1 UpLink Max Bandwidth: 64 UpLink Min Bandwidth: 32 DownLink Max Bandwidth: 96 DownLink Min Bandwidth: 64 Other parameters: Use defaults. Step 3. Mount an omni-directional antenna on the roof of the vehicle. This will serve as the antenna for the CPE. Step 4. Bring the RF cable from the omni-directional antenna into the vehicle through the window. Attach the antenna to the antenna input of the CPE. The rotating upright antenna on the CPE needs to be removed to perform this step. You will also need to disconnect the patch antennas inside (Figure G3). Figure G3: Patch Antennas Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 185 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 5. Connect the DC to AC power converter to the power port in the vehicle. Step 6. Step 7. Connect the CPE power supply to the CPE and to the DC to AC power converter. Step 8. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the laptop computer and to the If applicable, place the external antenna on the top of the vehicle. Ethernet port on the CPE. Step 9. Connect the GPS to the serial port on the laptop computer. Step 10. Optional: Connect the laptop power supply to the DC to AC power converter. (The laptop can be run off of its battery.) Step 11. Power on the GPS and the laptop computer. Step 12. On the laptop computer, start the Navini Networks Drive Study application. Step 13. Verify that the GPS location latitude, longitude, and time is seen in the application. Step 14. Power on the CPE. Step 15. Enter a memo into the log file comment field of the Constellation Debugger about the route of the Drive Study being performed. When finished, click the log comment button. Step 16. Start driving along the Drive Study route determined during the RF coverage analysis. Do not exceed 10 - 15 mph. Step 17. When testing is completed, prepare the file(s) to be sent back to Navini for post-
processing and analysis. 186 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Drive Study Form Navini Networks Drive Test Check list Specify the following items before the drive test Drive test area name Date of Drive Test Drive Tester Name Standard Vehicle Name and Type CPE EID Frequency Band (ISM, MMDS) CPE test device RF cable loss (dB) CPE Test device Antenna gain (calibrated) Drive Route (Map attached) Drive test file name BTS Transmit Power Fill the site configuration BTS ID BTS antenna height BTS antenna Omni/Patch Mounted on the top or side Antenna Azimuth Antenna downtilt Drive Test Route Plan High Density Urban Covered Commercial/Industrial Residential with Trees Residential with Few Trees Paved Areas Grass/Agriculture Open Area Forested Areas Water Airports Others Things to pay attention to:
1. Make sure that the GPS data on the constellation debugger is updating all the time during the drive tes 2. Make sure that the antenna only selects the omni port all the time. 3. Make sure that the CPE is locked to the correct BTS by checking the BTS ID and frequency. 4. Make sure that the RF connections are good all the time. Check this by observing the stability of the R 5. Please make proper log information in certain important locations. Typical Clutter Height Yes / No Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 187 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Appendix H: Location (FTP) Tests Introduction The Location, or FTP, Test is performed to check the Ripwave system operation through file transfers between the Base Station and the CPE. The test measures the data rate performance at various locations within the coverage area. Data throughput is measured by executing file transfers using the FTP protocol for both upstream and downstream links. A file server must be in place on the same subnet with the BTS to accurately perform the file transfer, and the CPE User computer must be loaded with an FTP Client. As the file transfer is running, a data file is captured by the CPE tool. Data rates are captured by the FTP program. Data is recorded in a spreadsheet format. The spreadsheet lists the location, GPS, and other information. As data rates are captured, the results are entered manually. An average SNR and sync RSSI can be read from the debug tool, and recorded, for quick comparison to the acceptable criteria (see Acceptable Criteria section of this appendix). For NLOS indoor locations, tests are performed both outside the building and inside, so that the obstruction loss for the building can be determined. Unless the customer can provide indoor access, all results will be LOS or Near NLOS. Planning the Locations Before the actual testing is conducted, you will need to select the locations for the testing to occur. The sites should meet specific criteria and include a mixture of the following environments:
High Power (A), low clutter; close in, residential High Power (A), high clutter; close in, commercial Medium Power (B), low clutter; mid-range, residential Medium Power (B), high clutter; mid-range, commercial Low Power (C), low clutter; distant, residential Lower Power (C), high clutter; distant, commercial Where:
(A) High Power is equal to > -70 dBm sync value
(B) Medium Power is equal to < -70 dBm and > -85 dBm sync value
(C) Low Power is equal to < -85 dBm, but > -95 dBm sync value 188 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide At least 5 test points for each type are attempted. This may be difficult, depending upon the actual deployment scenario. Results may yield a very large percentage in one of the categories. For selecting an even spread across a 120 degree sector for a panel antenna installation, divide the 120 degrees into 6 even slices of 20 degrees each. Then divide each slice into 2 Km segments. This spaces each location at an approximate even distance throughout the complete sector and yields 36 test sites. To select an even spread across a 360 degree cell for an omni antenna installation, divide the 360 degree cell into 12 even slices of 30 degrees each. Next, divide each slice into segments based on distance (1 Km or 2 Km, depending upon propagation). This will approximately space each location an even distance from each other throughout the complete cell, yielding approximately 48 test sites (based on a 4 Km cell radius). To do this, split the cell into 4 quadrants. Using the RF coverage analysis, select up to 16 locations per quadrant (Figure H1). Pay particular attention to null areas and the cell edges. At these locations you will perform a file transfer to measure the data rates available. The FTP/Location Test Tool program and the BTS Beamforming Display tool will be used to record RF parameters during each test. Figures H1 and H2 provide examples of simple guidelines for selecting an even spread across a cell area. Figure H1: Example of a 3-sector Site Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 189 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. E E E F F F Figure H2: Example of 120 of an Omni Site C C C D D D B B B A A A A6 A6 A6 A5 A5 A5 A4 A4 A4 A3 A3 A3 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 Acceptable Criteria In order to evaluate the test results, several criteria are reviewed. These criteria are valid for both LOS and NLOS measurements.
Processed Sync Signal Strength: For a given test location, +/- 2 dB variation during FTP
Absolute Sync Signal Strength - Processed Sync Signal Strength: <= to 2 dB variation during
SNR values consistent during the FTP for all carriers used:
FTP a. QPSK:
b. 8 PSK:
c. QAM 16:
>= 11 dB
>= 16 dB
>= 19 dB
UL and DL Packet Error Rates (PER) <= 1%. This will vary according to interference levels, but may not render the system inoperable.
Uplink Beamforming Gain: <= 21 dB and >= 16 dB. Perform a comparison of UL and DL, Beamforming Gain differences should be <= 3 dB. 190 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide
CPE Transmit Power < 25 dBm; BTS Transmit Power < 0 dBm per code channel with power control
Sync vs. Data Rate:
Absolute Sync (dBm)
(A) -55 to -70
(B) -70 to -85
(C) -85 to -95 UL Data Rate (Mbps) 0.6 to 1.0 0.5 to 1.0 0.10 to 0.5 DL Data Rate (Mbps) 1.5 to 2.0 1.2 to 2.0 0.3 to 1.0 Process The recommended process for performing the Location (FTP) tests is described below. First: Verify that a single CPE transmits and receives data at expected rates, as indicated previously. Second: Verify that multiple CPEs simultaneously transmit and receive data at acceptable rates, and the parameters listed above are being met. NOTE: The exact number of CPEs is determined by field conditions. The minimum is two. Third: Verify operation at the full range of the system*. Include LOS Location Tests at cell edges. The height of CPE and uplink and downlink data rates are recorded for each site. Data rates are to be compared with expected results, as seen in the last item (Sync vs. Data Rate) of Acceptance Criteria. For example:
*2.6 GHz :
*2.4 GHz:
Equipment Required
~12 Km
~ 3 Km Laptop computer GPS with serial cable FTP/Location Test Tool application BTS Beamforming diagnostic tool CPE CPE power supply DC to AC power converter Ethernet Cable Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 191 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Location (FTP) Test Procedure Two people are needed to perform this procedure. One will be in the car performing the location test, and the other will be at the Base Station checking the operation using the BTS Beamforming diagnostic tool. 1. Ensure that the Base Station has successfully completed calibration, RF sanity measurements, and the Drive Study at the frequency and TX/RX signal levels that were determined by the cell site survey. Also ensure that the Base Station is powered on and is able to transmit and receive data. 2. Connect the DC to AC power converter to the power port in the vehicle. 3. Connect the CPE power supply to the CPE and to the DC to AC power converter. 4. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the laptop computer and to the Ethernet port on the CPE. 5. Connect the GPS to the serial port on the laptop computer. 6. Drive to one of the locations selected on the RF coverage analysis. Stop and turn off the vehicle. 7. Power on the GPS, the CPE, and the laptop computer. Place the CPE on the roof of the vehicle. 8. Start the Navini Networks FTP/Location Test Tool program. 9. Verify that the Base Station is transmitting and that the CPE establishes sync and can communicate with the Base Station. Ping a device address on the network side of the Base Station, and verify that a reply is received. While monitoring the Constellation Debugger, position the CPE to reduce the difference between absolute sync and processed sync levels to 2 or less. 10. Enter a memo into the comment field about which link of the test is being performed. 11. Verify that the GPS input is seen in the application. 12. Put the location number/site identifier into the comment field of the Navini Networks Constellation Debugger, and press the Enter key. This will identify the site location. 13. On the EMS connected to the Base Station, start the BTS Beamforming diagnostic tool. 14. From the laptop computer with the CPE connected to it, start a downlink FTP file transfer. Record the results on the site page or in the log. 15. On the EMS connected to the Base Station, using the BTS Beamforming diagnostic tool verify the strength and direction of the beam during the file transfer. Record the results on the site page or in the log. 16. Repeat the file transfer three times, stopping and starting the Debugger and Beamforming tool for each transfer 17. Repeat steps 14-15, this time performing an uplink FTP transfer. 192 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide 18. When finished, remove the CPE from the roof and secure equipment for travel. 19. Drive to the next location selected on the RF coverage analysis. Stop, and turn off the vehicle. 20. Repeat steps 7 to 19 until all locations are tested. At this point send this data to the RF Engineers to analyze, or continue until each quadrant in the cell is complete. When you send the results depends upon the schedule or results from the file transfers. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 193 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Location (FTP) Test Form The form for recording the Location (FTP) test results is an Excel spreadsheet. Shown in Table H1, the actual column headers go across the top of the form, but are broken into two sections here for readability. Table H1: Location (FTP) Test Form BTS ID Site name File name; CPE File name; BTS Sector Distance
(Km) 0 Software Release LOS NLOS CPE CPE w/
ext FTP Data Rate Downlink
(Kbps) FTP Data Rate Uplink
(Kbps) Absolute Sync (dB) Remarks 0 0 288 Downlink Uplink 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 distance Km 0.8 1 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 s p b M e t a r a t a d 194 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix I: Customer Acceptance Base Station Installation & Commissioning Services Customer Acceptance Form Customer Name:
Customers Authorized Representative:
Job Title:
Office Address:
Email Address:
Office Phone:
Cell Phone or Pager:
Site Name:
Site Description:
Site Physical Address:
INSTALLATION SECTION:
Date Installation Started:
Customer Acceptance By: _____________________ __________ COMMISSIONING SECTION:
Date Commissioning Started:
Customer Acceptance By: _____________________ ______________________________ TEST ACCEPTANCE SECTION:
Date Testing Started:
Customer Acceptance By: _____________________ Completed:
Title: ________________Date:
Completed:
_________ Title: ________________Date:
Completed:
________ ________ Title: ________________Date: ______________________________ Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 195 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. This Customer Acceptance Form is subject to and governed by all of the terms and conditions set forth in the Master Supply Agreement between the parties. The Customer acknowledges, understands and agrees that when its Authorized Representative signs-off the Test Acceptance Section of this Form, Customer has thoroughly inspected the installation and commissioning services, and Customers sign-off means that completion of on-site verification that the Equipment installed by Seller performs in accordance with the Acceptance Criteria set forth in the Master Supply Agreement between the parties. The completed Navini Networks Site Installation and Commissioning Documents referenced below and attached hereto are incorporated by reference into this Customer Acceptance Form for all purposes. Navini Networks Site Installation and Commissioning Documents (double-click on the box to check or de-select a checkmark when completing the form):
Site Candidate Evaluation Report Site Materials BoM Site Drawings Site Construction Specific Tests, as required Grounding System Test Results, Concrete Break Test Results, Tower Guy Tensioning Test Results, etc. Site Specific Digital Photographs, as Required RFS System Tests Base Station Installation Certification Base Station Calibration Verification Location (FTP) Tests Drive Studies Coverage Predictions Maps Soft Copies of Test Results, if Requested 196 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix J: Outdoor Enclosures Overview The information in this Appendix is intended to assist Navini Networks customers in identifying typical features and requirements for an outdoor telecommunications equipment enclosure
(outdoor cabinet or cabinet) that is compatible with Navini Networks Base Transceiver Station
(BTS) equipment. This document is not intended to be an all-inclusive explanation of outdoor cabinet design and selection requirements. Instead, it is focused on providing customers with design suggestions for an outdoor cabinet that will attempt to replicate an environmentally controlled indoor environment for Navini Networks BTS equipment. Additionally, other design and performance suggestions are provided in an effort to assist customers, who may be unfamiliar with developing requirements for outdoor cabinets, to communicate more effectively a set of design and performance requirements to a cabinet manufacturer. The information in this document pertains only to Navini Networks BTS equipment. Customers are advised to consult with a manufacturer specializing in the construction of customized outdoor cabinets and to take the manufacturers recommendations for designing an outdoor cabinet that will meet Navini Networks BTS equipment installation and operating requirements. Due to (a) customer-specific site installation requirements and/or installation standards and the use of customer supplied ancillary equipment, including but not limited to rectifiers, batteries, microwave radios, networking equipment, network interface equipment, or other electronic, electrical, and mechanical components, and (b) customer supplied third-party installation services, Navini Networks cannot guarantee the operational performance of BTS equipment installed within an outdoor cabinet that does not maintain an operating environment within the defined operating parameters of the Navini Networks BTS equipment. Navini Networks does not manufacture or sell outdoor cabinets, and does not recommend the use of any particular manufacturers outdoor cabinet. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 197 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 2.3, 2.6GHz Split Digital & RF Chassis 19 X 19 X 13 (HWD) 14 X 19 X 13 (HWD) 1,353 Watts, 21VDC to 28VDC @ 56A (4,618 BTU) 2 - lugs for +24Vdc and 24VReturn BTS Mechanical & Electrical Specifications Table J1: 2.6 GHz BTS Physical:
Mechanical Dimensions Digital:
Mechanical Dimensions RF DC Power:
DC Power Interface:
Operational Temperature Range: 0 to +50 degrees C Storage Temperature Range:
Weight:
Service Accessibility:
Humidity:
Table J2: BTS to RFS Interface RFS Antenna (per BTS):
RFS Antenna Calibration (per BTS):
RFS Antenna Power/Data (per BTS):
-40 to +70 degrees C 100 lbs. Front and rear access required 0 to 95% non-condensing 8 Type N Female Connectors 1 Type N Female Connector Burndy G6B14-92PNE-32 Power Connector (1.0625 OD). The power connector is part of a pre-terminated cable assembly ordered in 25 increments. The power data cable assembly utilizes an Alpha Wire (P/N 5136C) composite cable. 2 Type N Female Connectors Network (WAN) Interfaces 8 ANSI, Bellcore ANSI T1.403 AMI/B8ZS Spec 1.1 UNI 4.0 2000 AAL5 ATM Adaptation (VBR real, VBR Non-Real, UBR) RFC 1483 (LLC, SNAP) 10/100BaseT (Ipv4) Ethernet Diffserv, Class based queuing (3 priority queues), WFQ IEEE 802.3 / Ethernet II GPS Antenna:
T1/E1 Interface Number of T1/E1s:
Standards Compliance:
Line Coding:
Inverse Multiplexing ATM
(IMA):
ATM Standards Compliance:
Number of PVCs:
ATM Adaptation:
Bridging Protocol:
Ethernet Standards Compliance:
QoS:
Packet Format:
198 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Outdoor Cabinet Features & Considerations General Outdoor cabinets are designed to house electronic equipment, electrical equipment, and other ancillary components (equipment) in outdoor environments where temperature, dirt, dust, oil, water, and other contaminants may be a factor in the operation of the equipment. Cabinet Construction Frames, Doors & Mounting Rails Outdoor cabinets may have any number of metallic and non-metallic (non-conductive) corrosion resistant materials in their construction. Predominantly due to a combination of acceptable overall cost, strength, weight, and corrosion resistance, .125 (1/8) thick 5052 H32 aluminum or other similar alloys are typically utilized in cabinet construction. Aluminum alloys provide approximately the same stiffness as steel at about half the weight of steel, even though about 40% more aluminum is required to attain the same stiffness as steel. Fabrication Outdoor cabinets are typically constructed of a combination of welded, bolted, hinged, or screwed panels attached or bonded to structural components. Construction methods used are determined by a combination of price and function. NEMA Rating Outdoor cabinets normally utilize fabrication and assembly methods that will meet NEMA Type 3R or Type 4 rating requirements. The use of either NEMA Type 3R or Type 4 cabinets is subject to the customers specific design requirements. Other types of NEMA rated enclosures may be provided by a cabinet manufacturer to meet customer design requirements. NEMA Type 4 NEMA Type 4 enclosures are rated for indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against splashing water, windblown dust and rain, and hose directed water, and to remain undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. NEMA Type 4 enclosures do not provide protection against submersion. Gaskets are typically utilized to provide weather tight seals for hinged, bolted, and screwed panels on NEMA 4 rated enclosures. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 199 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. NEMA Type 3R NEMA Type 3R enclosures are rated for indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against falling rain and sleet and to remain undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. NEMA Type 3R enclosures do not provide protection against submersion. Typical examples of NEMA 3R cabinets are external enclosures containing above-ground electrical panels, and other equipment, that may or may not require ventilation Finishes Outdoor cabinets are normally finished with UV resistant powder-coated polyurethane coatings. The finishes are baked on after coating, provide excellent resistance to damage, are very durable, and provide superior corrosion resistance. Normal colors are tan, white, and green, in shades typically used by traditional telecom service providers. Other types of coatings and colors may be available from a cabinet manufacturer to meet specific zoning requirements. In the event that a cabinet manufacturer is unable to provide a specific custom color, the cabinet manufacturer will usually be able to provide a refinishing process and third-party coating sources that can supply coatings that are compatible with the original factory finish. Bullet Resistance Due to the emphasis on being light-weight, low maintenance, and corrosion resistance, outdoor cabinets are not normally constructed to provide bullet resistance, although a cabinet manufacturer may be able to provide this functionality. Expandability Outdoor cabinets come in both single- and multi-cabinet styles in order to meet the design criteria of the customer. Manufacturer designs of multi-bay cabinets may utilize either single cabinet modular sections that bolt together to form larger multi-bay cabinets with seals between cabinets, or welded multi-bay cabinets that do not utilize seals between cabinet equipment mounting bays. Care should be taken to ensure that multi-bay cabinet designs or expansions of single-bay cabinets provide adequate airflow between cabinet equipment bays. Lifting Eyes Cabinets are usually equipped by the manufacturer with lifting eyes to permit placement on site using a crane. Depending on the manufacturer, the lifting eyes may or may not be removable. Equipment Access BTS equipment will require an outdoor cabinet that provides front and rear access for installation and maintenance of the BTS equipment. 200 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Sizing Outdoor cabinets should be sized or designed to provide:
Unrestricted maintenance access to all installed equipment, wiring, cabling, and conduits by field maintenance personnel. Placement of equipment at internal mounting elevations, relative to ground level, that will provide field maintenance personnel with access to installed equipment at reasonable working heights, for all or the majority of installed equipment. These requirements may be met through the use of base extenders, bottom mounted battery cabinets, taller equipment bays, or a combination of all of these design techniques. Sufficient space for the routing and termination of all internal wiring, cables, and conduits, consistent with minimum bend radius requirements, and direction and/or manner of entry into or out of the equipment cabinet. Sufficient space in front of, behind, above, and below installed equipment to allow for unrestricted airflow within the cabinet. Sufficient reserve space in front of, behind, above, and below installed equipment to support minor changes to installed equipment mechanical dimensions, as a result of changes in vendor equipment utilized, or to support future vendor equipment design modifications. Optional Cabinet Components Integral AC Load Center Integral AC load centers provide the ability to connect the outdoor cabinets commercial AC power input directly to a power utility transformer. A typical load center will employ a meter base, service disconnect, and breaker equipped load center, installed on the cabinet by the manufacturer. Advantages Factory installation of an integral AC load center offers lower field installation costs; quicker cabinet field deployment; improved site installation quality; and reduced instances of cabinet damage caused by installation personnel unfamiliar with the cabinet design, construction, penetration, and weather sealing requirements. Disadvantages Higher initial costs. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 201 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Air Conditioner(s) Air conditioners provide active cooling to equipment in the outdoor cabinet and are normally used on cabinets where thermoelectric coolers, multiple air insulated walls, Air to Air Heat Exchangers, and Forced Air cooling do not provide adequate capability to maintain internal cabinet air temperatures within acceptable ranges for installed equipment. Air conditioners may be equipped with economizers to reduce operating costs, as well as heat strips, to prevent ice formation on the evaporator coils, and heat to the interior of the cabinet. The use of air conditioners requires careful consideration of airflow within the interior of the cabinet, to ensure that adequate cooling is provided to all equipment in the cabinet and that hot spots are not created. Sizing Air conditioners should be sized to provide for an optimal duty cycle and reserve cooling capacity. A high duty cycle will typically lead to early failure of the air conditioner, since air conditioners are not normally intended to have an extremely high duty cycle. Significant over-
sizing of an air conditioner will lead to inefficient operation and greater initial air conditioner and cabinet costs required to support the larger air conditioner. Consideration should be given to providing a percentage of reserve capacity to allow for additions to the installed equipment, increases in power requirements of installed equipment, and loss of efficiency of the air conditioner due to age or leakage of refrigerant over time. Reserve capacity is likely to be reflected in a reduced duty cycle for the installed air conditioner. Advantages Air conditioners can be sized to support thermal loads in excess of those that can be managed with other active and passive cooling techniques. Additionally, internal cabinet temperatures and humidity levels can be maintained at consistent levels, which may contribute to greater equipment stability and longevity. Disadvantages The loss of commercial power to an outdoor cabinet equipped with an air conditioner and a backup power system may not prevent the site from failing, even if adequate backup power exists to power the equipment installed in the cabinet for the duration of the power outage, due to the inability of the backup power system to operate the air conditioner. Without the air conditioner removing waste heat generated by the equipment installed in the cabinet and by heat contributed by solar gain, during summer months, the internal air temperature inside the cabinet may reach a sufficiently high level to cause failure to one or more pieces of installed equipment within the cabinet, as a result of overheating. Additionally, utility costs and maintenance costs will be higher for sites with air conditioners installed in an outdoor cabinet. 202 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Backup Power System General Backup power systems provide a means of extending operations of the installed equipment during periods of extended commercial power failure. Backup power systems may be as simple as providing a combination of suitably sized rectifiers and DC storage batteries, or may include more complicated site installed generators in combination automatic transfer switches, and storage batteries. Rectifiers The AC/DC rectifier(s) should be chosen based on power delivered to the load(s). For example, the DC Power requirements listed for the Base Station RF & Digital chassis may be just part of the overall power requirement. It is recommended that the AC/DC rectifiers rating exceed the expected load by some 20%, or per the rectifier manufacturers guidelines based on consideration not limited to expected load, temperature range, and reliability. Storage Batteries Storage batteries provide variable capacity backup power to extend installed equipment operations. Storage batteries utilized for outdoor, uncontrolled environment operations normally consist of valve regulated lead acid batteries. The selection of storage batteries depends on a combination of factors that may include, but are not limited to The surrounding environmental conditions in which the outdoor cabinet will be placed;
The amount of backup time desired by the customer;
The stability of the local power grid;
The historical duration of commercial power outages; and Local environmental regulations. Low Voltage Disconnect Low voltage disconnect should be provided to protect the batteries & the Base Station equipment once the batteries reach the manufacturers rating for minimum cell voltage. The Base Station is rated to 20VDC minimum. It should be noted that as battery voltage declines, the current demanded increases as power required remains constant. Generator Power generators provide an alternative for back-up power. Generator ratings are again based on the power required by the loads, which, as mentioned above, include the Base Station RF &
Digital chassis as well as other supporting equipment. Consult with the manufacturers recommendations when selecting a particular generator based on required installation. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 203 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Generator Receptacle Typically, enclosures and generators are custom entities. The receptacle that is chosen is influenced by the generator chosen, the outdoor enclosure, and the customers needs. Several types are used, and we recommend consulting with the generator & enclosure manufacturers. External Battery Compartment General:
External battery compartments provide ventilated enclosure space suitable for the installation of batteries that will allow extended operation of installed electrical and electronic equipment in the event of the loss of primary electrical power at the site where the cabinet is installed. The use of an external battery compartment is generally recommended to prevent battery gases from reaching electronic and electrical equipment located inside a NEMA 4 Type outdoor cabinet. Construction:
Battery compartments normally utilize NEMA 3R ventilated enclosures to allow venting of battery gases, and are normally installed beneath a NEMA Type 4 cabinet containing electrical and electronic equipment and components. The use of a battery compartment usually improves access for field maintenance personnel by elevating the electrical and electronic equipment inside the main cabinet to a better working height. Battery Warmer The use of a better warming pad is generally recommended for backup power systems utilizing storage batteries, in climates where air temperatures may drop sufficiently low to reduce the available capacity of storage batteries or cause the battery to freeze. Base Extender The use of a base extender should be considered to elevate the base of the cabinet above a foundation to prevent the accumulation of water in contact with the cabinet base, or to permit the accumulation of minor amounts of snow or other debris at a level cabinet base. Depending on the environment in which the outdoor cabinet is installed, the lack of a base extender may contribute to accelerated corrosion of the cabinet or allow moisture and debris entry into either the cabinet or a battery compartment. 204 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Thermal Management General Outdoor cabinets utilize various methods to maintain a cabinets internal temperature with acceptable operating ranges of equipment installed within the cabinet. Thermal management includes management of heat gain from internal and external sources, as well as heat loss, to a lesser extent, due to low winter air and ground temperatures. A BTS installed in an outdoor cabinet will likely be impacted to a greater extent by environmental conditions during summer months, due to a combination of radiant solar heat gain and outside air/ground temperatures, which limit the cabinets ability to dissipate internally generated heat out of the cabinet. During winter conditions, except in extreme conditions, thermal dissipation by electric and electronic equipment and components inside the cabinet are generally sufficient to maintain the interior temperature of the cabinet at a level within the operational range of all installed equipment. Heat Transfer Heat may enter (or exit) an outdoor cabinet in one of three transfer modes: conduction, convection, and radiation (radiant heat). Heat gain and loss from conduction is a result of direct contact between the cabinet and the foundation or other structure with which the cabinet is in contact. Convection heat gain and loss results from the transfer of heat between the cabinet and the outside air in contact with the cabinet. Radiant heat gain and loss results from absorption of radiant energy from a warmer source by a cooler source. Radiant energy is transferred through air without heating the air. Every material or object with a temperature above absolute zero emits radiant energy in all directions until it is deflected or absorbed. For an outdoor cabinet, the primary method of heat gain into the interior of the cabinet is usually from radiant heat from the sun, although convection and conduction will play varying but usually lesser roles. Control of each type of heat gain or loss usually requires different techniques by cabinet manufacturers. The selection of one or more methods used to control heat gain or loss is dependent upon the customers specific equipment requirements. External Heat Sources External cabinet heat sources primarily consist of the following:
Radiant - sun, rooftops, nearby structures. Convection - structures or material in direct contact with the cabinet. Convection - air surrounding the cabinet. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 205 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Internal Heat Sources Internal cabinet heat sources primarily consist of installed electrical and electronic equipment that dissipate waste heat during operation of the BTS equipment. Waste heat may be controlled to a limited extent by careful selection of electrical and electronic components that operate more efficiently and thus dissipate less waste heat into the interior of the cabinet. Equipment Thermal Dissipation The limiting factor in the operation of the BTS will be the single component or piece of electrical or electronic equipment installed within the cabinet that is most susceptible to failure as a result of the internal temperature of the cabinet, whether it is the BTS or another piece of ancillary equipment. Based on the climate, operating environment, amount and type of equipment installed within the cabinet, and susceptibility of installed equipment to the internal environmental conditions within the cabinet, different thermal management solutions may be required to maintain an acceptable operating temperature range within the cabinet. Cabinet manufacturers utilize various types of active and passive cooling systems:
Air Conditioners Air to Air Heat Exchangers Multiple Wall and Heat Shields Forced Air Insulation Airflow Sufficient airflow must be provided around installed equipment to eliminate hot spots that may contribute to shortened installed equipment life or failure. 206 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Security Locks In order to restrict access to internal areas of the outdoor cabinet to only authorized maintenance personnel, the cabinet should be equipped with (a) corrosion resistant integral keyed locks for all hinged access doors; and (b) corrosion resistant fasteners, which require the use of special tools for access points, where routine entry is not allowed. External Lighting Consideration should be given to the site location where the outdoor cabinet will be installed. While lighting is not a cabinet specific function, in the event that external lighting is necessary or anticipated, allowances should be made during the cabinet design to support the necessary requirements placed on the cabinet in this event. This includes but is not limited to requirements for power, cabinet penetrations, and light control equipment placement. Site Placement Ground installation The outdoor cabinet should be placed on a solid foundation or equipment platform designed by a licensed engineer. Foundation design should be based on the bearing capacity of the soil on which the foundation or platform is located. Building Rooftop or Equipment Room Installation A structural analysis should be performed by a licensed Structural Engineer. The Structural Engineer will determine if (a) a rooftop or interior equipment room floor must be reinforced; (b) the cabinet should be relocated to another point on the rooftop; or (c) another site should be selected to prevent damage to the rooftop or to the building structure. The combination of the weight of the cabinet material and the installed electrical, electronic, or mechanical components may readily exceed the design load capacity of the rooftop or floor on which the cabinet is installed. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 207 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Maintenance Access Ensure either through on-site measurement or through review of site A&E, survey, or building drawings that the outdoor cabinet, as placed at the final site location, will permit:
Unrestricted access to all points of access to the cabinet interior. All cabinet doors to fully open and latch (if equipped). In inclement weather conditions, unrestrained access doors are a potential hazard to maintenance personnel and equipment located between the cabinet frame and the door. Required separation from certain electrical equipment and panels in compliance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). Conduit & Cable Access Placement of the cabinet should take into consideration the routing, size, bend radius, and maintenance access of all required power, signal, RF, or other cables and conduits that must enter and exit the cabinet. Care should be taken in the routing of all conduits placed at ground level that may restrict access to maintenance battery compartments or that may create a potential personnel hazard when placed in access routes used by maintenance personnel. Penetrations General Numerous penetrations into an outdoor cabinet may be required, and the total quantity and location are dependent upon the cabinet design, installed equipment, unique site requirements, and customer preference. For an environmentally controlled cabinet that is designed to maintain a weather tight seal, all penetrations - whether utilized or not - should be sealed with an appropriate and durable seal, gasket, plate, or other material that will maintain the weather-tight integrity of the outdoor cabinet. Failure to maintain an adequate seal may allow the entry of moisture, insects, small animals, or battery gases into the outdoor cabinet. An inadequate seal may also negatively impact the ability of the environmental equipment to maintain the installed equipment within the designed operating range, or to incur greater energy utilization. 208 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Design Cabinet penetrations should be designed, sized, and located to permit the easy entry of required wiring and cabling into and out of the cabinet, and should be of sufficient size to permit the insertion/removal of pre-terminated cables and wires, if utilized. Cabinet penetrations should support site-specific installation requirements. For example, the RFS antenna coaxial cable type and size will vary due to the combination of the height of the installed antenna and the horizontal and vertical runs from the cabinet to the antenna support structure, as well the customers choice of vendor for the coaxial cables. Cabinets should be designed to prevent weakening of the cabinet structure due to close proximity or excessive penetrations within a confined space. Reinforcement of the cabinet, or special access ports, may be utilized by a cabinet manufacturer to mitigate or eliminate this as a concern. Cabinets should maintain the bend radius of all wire and cables penetrating the cabinet within acceptable tolerances. Obstructions within the cabinet, either singularly or in combination, may be created as a result of internal placement of cabinet structural components, or installed electrical, electronic, mechanical equipment. Cabinet design should minimize or eliminate potential personnel hazards caused by cables and conduit exiting the cabinet. Penetrations Required Subject to other considerations defined in this document, the following penetrations may or may not be utilized:
AC Power (service entrance, convenience outlet(s), external lighting, etc.) DC Power (connection to battery compartment) Generator receptacle Grounding (electrical, antenna lightning arrestors, AC surge protection, Telco surge protection) Network Transport (microwave, fiber, T1, Ethernet, etc..) Telco (POTS) Alarm Antenna (multiple - refer to Navini BTS requirements) Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 209 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Outdoor Cabinet Manufacturers General This section includes a list of several outdoor cabinet manufacturers, with available contact information. Inclusion of a manufacturer on this list does not represent an endorsement of the manufacturer or its products by Navini Networks. Manufacturers List EMAR EMAR Inc. 2200 E. Memorial Drive Muncie, Indiana 47302 Phone: (765)-289-3777 Fax: (765)-289-3785 http://www.emarinc.com email: info@emarinc.com Hendry Hendry 55 Castilian Drive Santa Barbara, CA 93117-3080 Phone: (805) 968-5511 Fax: (805) 968-9561 http://www.hendry.com Contacts:
Jim Heath, Eastern Region Sales Manager, Phone: (321) 733-7850, email: jheath@hendry.com 210 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Emerson Energy Systems Emerson Energy Systems Limited Inc. Phone: (972) 367-4300 Fax: (972) 367-0066 http://www.-emersonenergy-na.com/
email: US@EmersonEnergy-NA.com Contacts:
Hans Heimersson, Product Manager, Phone: (972)-367-4376 Henrik Schubert, Business Development Manager, (972) 367-4380 Marconi Marconi Communications 4350 Weaver Parkway Warrenville, IL 60555 Phone: (630) 579-5000 Fax: (630) 579-5050 http://www.marconi.com/osp Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 211 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 212 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix K: Install Connectors on Cables The following procedures are for installing Times connectors on LMR cable. The procedure may vary for different types of connectors and cables. You will need to install connectors on both ends of each cable. Install EZ-600 N-type male connectors on all LMR 600 cables. Install EZ-400 N-type male connectors on all LMR 400 cables. The steps below can be used for both connectors. Step 1. Ensure that the cable is cut straight. Step 2. Slide the heat shrink boot and crimp ring onto the cable. Strip the cable end using the ST-600-EZ prep/strip tool by inserting the cable into End 1 and rotating the tool. Remove any residual plastic from the center conductor. Insert the cable into End 2 of the ST-600-EZ prep/strip tool and rotate the tool to remove the plastic jacket. Step 3. Step 4. Debur the center conductor using the DBT-01 deburring tool. Step 5. Flare the braid slightly and push the connector body onto the cable until the connector meets resistance and then snaps into place. Then slide the crimp ring forward, creasing the braid. Step 6. Slide the crimp ring back, and trim the excess braid at the crease line. Slide the crimp ring forward until it butts up against the connector body. Step 7. Position the heavy duty HX-4 crimp tool with the appropriate dies (.510hex) directly behind and adjacent to the connector body, and crimp the connector. The crimp tool automatically releases when the crimp is complete. Step 8. Position the heat shrink boot as far forward on the connector body as possible without interfering with the coupling nut. Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink and form a weather tight seal. Step 9. Label all cables on both ends. Label the nine LMR-600 cables RFS 1 through RFS 8 and CAL. Label the two LMR-400 cables GPS 1 and GPS 2. Label the data/power cable (from the supplier) as POWER. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 213 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 214 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix L: Chassis Alarms The chassis contains two connectors that are used to send alarm indications to the BTS. One of the connectors, labeled CABINET ALARM, is used to trigger alarm conditions that occur within the external chassis. The second connector, labeled BBU, is used to process alarms from the battery backup unit. Both connectors contain six pins. The pin orientation, as seen from the back of the chassis, is shown in Figure L1. Figure L1: Pin Orientation Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 215 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. The alarm connector uses only four of the six pins. The pin names can be found in Table L1. Table L1: Pin Names Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name General Fail Alarm Ground reference for General Fail Alarm Door Open Alarm Ground reference for Door Open Alarm Not Connected Not Connected The first pin of the alarm connector is the General Fail Alarm. This signal should be left open to indicate an alarm condition from the HMC module located in the outdoor chassis. If no alarm condition exists, this pin should be driven low. Pin 2 is used as the ground reference for this alarm. The second alarm sent to the chassis is located on pin 3, Door Open Alarm. This signal should be driven low when the door is closed. To indicate that the door of the outdoor chassis is open, this signal should be left open. The associated ground reference for this signal is taken from pin 4. The BBU connector contains four alarm signals. These signal names are listed in Table L2. Table L2: BBU Signal Names Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name Digital Ground Reference BBU Battery Low BBU Rectifier Fail BBU AC Line Fail BBU Charge Fail Analog Ground Reference The first alarm signal is located on pin 2, BBU Battery Low. If the BBUs battery is running low, the signal on pin 2 should be left open. BBU Rectifier Fail alarm is the next alarm and is located on pin 3. This signal should be left open to indicate a failure on the Battery Backup Units rectifier. The next alarm condition occurs if the AC Line to the BBU fails. In this condition, signal BBU AC Line Fail on pin 4 should be left open. If the BBU is unable to hold a charge, then the BBU Charge Fail signal on pin 5 should be left open. For non-alarm conditions (normal operation), these signals should be driven low. The digital ground reference for these signals is located on pin 3. The analog ground reference should be located on pin 4. 216 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix M: Antenna Drawings Panel Antenna Broadband Sectored Panel Antenna Navini RFS Panel RFS Antenna Pattern 0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00
7
3 Vertical Horizontal Scale
8
1
4 8 4 7 3 CAL PWR/DATA 6 2 5 1 Standard Downtilt Bracket NAVINI PART NUMBER:
2.4GHz- without LNAs 2.4GHz- with LNAs 2.6GHz- EF without LNAs, Vertical Polarization 2.6GHz- EF with LNAs, Vertical Polarization 2.6GHz- EFGH without LNAs, Vertical Polarization 2.6GHz- EFGH with LNAs, Vertical Polarization 2.6GHz- EFGH without LNAs, Horizontal Polarization 2.6GHz- EFGH with LNAs, Horizontal Polarization 95-10043-00 95-00043-00 95-10005-00 95-00005-00 95-10005-05 95-00005-05 95-10005-10 95-00005-10 DESCRIPTION Frequency Range Polarization Antenna Gain Horizontal HPBW Vertical HPBW Connector Type's Lateral Thrust at 100 MPH (161 KM/HR) w/o ice Mounting Configurations Electrical Downtilt Mechanical Downtilt Weight 2.4GHz range = 2.4GHz through 2.473GHz 2.6GHz EF range = 2.602GHz through 2.638GHz 2.6GHz EFGH range = 2.596GHz through 2.686GHz Vertical or Horizontal 17 dBi FOR 120 Degree Sectored 80 Degrees 5 Degrees 9 Female "N" Type 1 - 12 Pin Female Circular 194 LB. Lateral Load To Pipe Mount - 2 3/4" TO 3" OD 0 Degrees 0 - 10 Degrees Mechanical 64 LB. Including Bracket Mount no pipe 3"
1'-11"
REAR VIEW DOWNTILT BRACKETS MOUNTING CLAMPS 3" od Max 3" od Max 6 1/8"
TOP VIEW 1'-11"
1'-4"
8 1/8"
4
1
3 8 1/8"
3"
Downtilt Bracket 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8
1
4
4
3 8
3
2 1 0 1
3
4
3 1
4 1
3 8 1/16"
Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 217 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Omni Antenna Broadband Omnidirectional Antenna Navini RFS Omni RFS Antenna Pattern 0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00 Vertical Horizontal Scale NAVINI PART NUMBERS:
2.4GHz- without LNAs 2.4GHz- with LNAs 2.6GHz- EF without LNAs 2.6GHz- EF with LNAs 2.6GHz- EFGH without LNAs 2.6GHz- EFGH with LNAs 95-24108-xx*
95-24008-xx*
95-26308-xx*
95-26108-xx*
95-26108-xx**
95-26008-xx**
* for 2.4GHz and 2.6GHz EF products, the present downtilt options are 0, 3, 5, and 7 degrees, to be specified by a -00, -03, -05, and -07 in place of -xx
** for 2.6GHz EFGH, the downtilt options are 2 and 4 degrees, to be specified by a -02 or a -04 in place of -xx DESCRIPTION 2.4GHz range = 2.4GHz through 2.473GHz 2.6GHz EF range = 2.602GHz through 2.638GHz 2.6GHz EFGH range = 2.596GHz through 2.686GHz Vertical 8dBi Omni 15 Degrees 9 Female "N" Type 1 - 12 Pin Female Circular 110 LB. Lateral Load To Pipe Mount 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 7 Degree N/A 43 LB. Including Mount Frequency Range Polarization Antenna Gain Horizontal HPBW Vertical HPBW Connector Type's Lateral Thrust at 100 MPH (161 KM/HR) w/o ice Mounting Configurations Electrical Downtilt Mechanical Downtilt Weight 218 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide B B U B B U Combo Chassis (ISM) Combo Chassis (ISM) Appendix N: Rectifier/BBU Specifications System Block Diagram Navini Networks uses a 1000 Watt Rectifier/Battery Backup Unit (BBU) for the Ripwave Base Transceiver Station (BTS) combo chassis, and a 1500 watt Rectifier/BBU for the Ripwave BTS split chassis. The system diagrams in Figure N1 depict the current flow from incoming AC voltage to BBU and the converted power into the BTS. The BBU is designed to provide a four-
hour battery backup for the BTS. The rectifier is designed with hot-swappable modules. Module redundancy of N+1 is required. Figure N1: System Diagrams Split Chassis (MMDS/WCS) Split Chassis (MMDS/WCS) AC INPUT:
AC INPUT:
180-265 VAC 180-265 VAC OR 115VAC OR 115VAC AC INPUT:
AC INPUT:
180-265 VAC 180-265 VAC OR 115VAC OR 115VAC Power @ 1100 Watts Power @ 1100 Watts Power @ 1000 Watts Power @ 1000 Watts Power @ 400 Watts Power @ 400 Watts AC/DC AC/DC Converter Converter AC/DC AC/DC Converter Converter Inner Loop Fans Inner Loop Fans Inner Loop Fans Inner Loop Fans Inner Loop Fans Inner Loop Fans Battery Battery 200 AH 200 AH Battery Battery 200 AH 200 AH Digital Shelf Digital Shelf 50 Amp 50 Amp 50 Amp 50 Amp 20 Amp 20 Amp RF Shelf RF Shelf B B U B B U B T S B T S B T S B T S Circuit Circuit Breaker Breaker Circuit Circuit Breaker Breaker 27V 27V 27V 27V Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 219 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Input Specifications The information in Table N1 shows the input required for the Ripwave BTS backup unit. Table N1: Input Specifications 180 to 265 VAC Input Voltage:
(Optional) Input Voltage: 92-125 VAC Frequency:
47 to 63 Hz Input Circuit Protection: Circuit Breaker Surge Voltage/Current:
Connection:
6 kV / 3 kA 4 wire 220V, 3 wire 110V Output Specifications In Table N2 are the output specifications for the Ripwave BTS backup unit. Table N2: Output Specifications
+27.2V +/- 2% (grounded negative pole) Nominal Rectifier DC Voltage:
Permitted Output Voltage Range: +22V ~ +28V (battery backup range: +21.0V ~ +27V) Shutoff Voltage:
Load:
Recharge Maximum Battery Voltage:
Dynamic Load Response Time:
Ripple & Noise:
Stability of Output Voltage:
Output Circuit Breakers:
At 21V 10% to maximum load
+27.6V
<5% - overshoot/undershoot for 10% to 90% load step in 50 uS. Psophometric voltage: less than 2mV rms 10Hz ~ 14MHz: less than 250mVp-p 10Hz ~ 10MHz: less than 50mV rms Wideband ripple and noise 1% of output voltage Line regulation: +/- 0.2%
Load regulation: +/- 0.5%
Each rectifier module requires input and output overload protection 220 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide General Specifications The information in Table N3 provides other specifications for the Ripwave BTS backup unit. Note that some specifications vary by BTS frequency model: 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, or 2.6 GHz. Table N3: General Specifications BTS Power Consumption:
Efficiency:
Power Factor:
Redundancy:
Battery Charge:
Turn on Delay:
Leakage Current:
Withstanding Voltage:
Recharging:
Floating:
Hot Swappable:
1000 Watts Combo Chassis 1500 Watts Split Chassis Minimum of 88 % (at maximum load) Minimum of 95% (at 50 ~ 100% load) Any single failure in the rectifier or controller shall not turn off output or cause voltage dip. Charge time shall be less than 10 hours. Charge method to be temperature compensated. 1 sec maximum. The rectifier shall start with any load. Maximum of 3.5 mA 1 minute/ 3.5 kVac (10mA) If the electricity fails, the battery must immediately turn on. When electricity is restored, it must begin recharging. When the battery has been fully charged. Rectifier consists of modules, which are hot-swappable.
+/- 5% maximum voltage change when inserting or extracting one module. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 221 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Protection Table N4 shows the protection specifications for the Ripwave BTS backup unit. Table N4: Protection Specifications Over-voltage Protection:
Under-voltage Protection: Shutdown at 21V with disconnect relay Shutdown at 30V. Power cycle to recover. Over-current Limit:
Over Temperature:
Short Circuit:
Input Protection:
Battery Protection:
At 110% ~ 130%. Auto recovery after the condition is removed. Auto-recovery Infinite short protection. Auto recovery after the condition is removed. AC main circuit breaker required Battery protection fuse required Reverse battery connection fuse protected Environmental Requirements Table N5 provides the environmental requirements for the Ripwave BTS backup unit. Table N5: Environmental Requirements Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Altitude:
Vibration:
Input Surge:
0 C to +50 C
-40 C to +70 C 5 to 95% non-condensing
-100 to 3,000 meters operating
-100 to 12,000 meters non-operating Telcordia GR-63-CORE, section 4.4, Zone 4, GR-487-CORE GR-1089-CORE 222 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Regulatory Requirements The BBU shall comply with all applicable requirements and conditional requirements of Telcordia. These are called out in Table N6. Table N6: Regulatory Requirements Input Surge Protection: GR-1089-CORE, section 4, up to 6 kV, 3 kA Safety:
EMI/EMC:
UL 1950, 3rd ed, CSA 22.2 #950 FCC Part 14 Subpart B, Class A GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety - Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment Section 3. Class A Section 4, up to 6 kV, 3 kA Appendix C, Type 1 GR-63-CORE Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection: Section 4, Zone 4 GR-487-CORE Electronic Equipment Cabinets Telcordia Requirements:
Reliability The reliability requirements for the Ripwave BTS backup unit are provided in Table N7. Table N7: Reliability Requirements Derating:
MTBF:
Expected Life:
Maintainability:
Use NAVMAT P4855 as a derating guideline. Exceptions must be approved by Navini Networks.
>500,000 hours for rectifier using Telcordia methodology.
>100,000 hours for total system including over current protection. 15 years There shall be no components that require periodic maintenance. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 223 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Alarm & Control The Alarm and Control Relay has dry contact: open for alarm, normally grounded (safe), for the following:
AC line failure Low battery voltage Rectifier failure Common chassis ground
(Optional) - self test go/no-go, if applicable
(Optional) - charger failure, if provided
(Optional) - output voltage sense line Mechanical Configuration The following list covers the mechanical configuration requirements for the Ripwave BTS backup unit. The internal rectifier should be 19 inch rack-mountable. The rectifier shall consist of N+1 hot swappable modules. If one module fails, there must be enough power handling capability to provide full output power for a load of 1KW. Rectifiers to provide internal cooling. No external forced air provided. Acoustic Noise less than 60dBA, 1 meter from front. Rectifier to provide front panel indicators: AC ON, Module Failure. The maximum dimensions of the rack are: 84 (H) x 19 (W). The BBU shall be placed in a single 19-inch rack. See diagram in Figure N2. Power exits: rear preferred; front is not acceptable. 224 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure N2: BBU Rack Rectifiers Rectifiers Batteries Batteries Batteries Batteries BTS BTS RU = 1.75 RU = 1.75 Power Relay Power Relay ISM - 1K ISM - 1K MMDS - 1.5K MMDS - 1.5K WCS - 1.5K WCS - 1.5K 20RU 20RU 4RU 4RU 6RU 6RU 6RU 6RU Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 225 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 226 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix O: Sample Bill of Materials (BoM) 1/13/2003 1:58:54 PM BOM EXPLOSION REPORT KIT, INSTALLATION, BTS, 2.6 Revision B Part Number: 95-05001-00 Part 13-00034-00 : CONN, COAX, CRIMP, N STRAIGHT PLUG, EZ PIN (LMR600) . Quantity: 36 Part 13-00194-00 A CONN, COAX, CRIMP, N STRAIGHT PLUG, EZ PIN, MALE (LMR400). Quantity: 8 Part Connectors, NType 13-00218-00 A CONN, LUG, ONE-HOLE #6. Quantity: 10 Connectors 13-00219-00 : CONN, LUG, TWO-HOLE #6. Quantity: 10 Connectors 13-00220-00 : CONN, LUG, TWO-HOLE #2. Quantity: 10 Part 18-00001-00 : CABLE, COAX, OUTDOOR RF, LMR600. Quantity: 1350 Part 18-00035-00 A WIRE, GROUND, GREEN, STRANDED, #2. Quantity: 50 Part 18-00036-00 : CABLE, COAX, OUTDOOR RF, LMR400. Quantity: 200 Cables, Coax 18-00049-00 : WIRE, STRANDED, GREEN, #6 AWG 50. Quantity: 13 Part 24-00045-00 : NUT, REG. HEX, CRES, 1/4-20UNC. Quantity: 8 Part 24-00117-00 : BUSS BAR, GROUND, TOWER, 1/4IN X 2-1/2IN X 12-1/2IN. Quantity: 1 Part 24-00118-00 : BUSS BAR, GROUND, SHELTER, 1/4IN X 4IN, DRILLED TO 5/8IN. Quantity: 1 Part 24-00119-00 : GRIP, HOISTING, PRE-LACED, FOR 1/2IN COAX CABLE. Quantity: 10 Part 24-00120-00 : HANGERS, ASSY, CUSHION, 5H, 1/2IN CORREGATED COAX. Quantity: 4 Mechanical Hardware 24-00121-00 : MOUNT, HANGER, CROSS CUSHION, KIT OF 5. Quantity: 2 Part 24-00122-00 : BLOCK, SUPPORT, MINI COAX. Quantity: 2 Part 24-00134-00 A BREAKER, OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION, 60 AMP, BTS INSTALLATION. Quantity: 1 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 227 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Mechanical Hardware 24-00156-00 : CLAMP, PIPE TO PIPE, KIT OF 2. Quantity: 1 Mechanical Hardware 24-00170-00 : NUT, REG. HEX, CRES, #10-24. Quantity: 3 Part 24-00171-00 : WASH, STAR, #10. Quantity: 3 Part 24-00172-00 : WASH, STAR, . Quantity: 16 Part 24-00250-10 : BOLT, HEX, 1/4-20 X 1.000 LG, SSPA. Quantity: 8 Mechanical Hardware 24-06156-43 : WASH, FLAT, CRES, #6 T-B-REGULAR, .156 X .438 X .040. Quantity: 16 Part 24-06250-14 : WASH, LOCK, SPLIT, CRES 1/4, Reg, .252X.487X.062. Quantity: 16 Part 32-00031-00 : ARRESTOR, LIGHTNING, RF 1.2 - 2.8GHz, N TYPE FEMALE, DC BLOCK, PSX. Quantity: 9 Part 32-00033-00 : ARRESTOR, LIGHTNING, GPS, PICKOR, DC PASS, MM50MNZ+6. Quantity: 2 Part 32-00052-00 : KIT, GROUNDING, LMR-600, 5FT X 1/2 IN, 2 HOLE LUG. Quantity: 9 Part 32-00053-00 : KIT, GROUNDING, LMR-400, 5FT X 3/8 IN, 2 HOLE LUG. Quantity: 2 Part 32-00077-00 : KIT, WEATHERPROOFING, GEL WRAP. Quantity: 1 Part 32-11004-00 : ARRESTOR, SURGE, EMP, DC BLOCK, RF COAX, In-line 2.4 GHz., PSX-ME. Quantity: 9 Part 92-00006-00 : SUBASSY, MOUNT UNIVERSAL FOR OMNI ANTENNA. Quantity: 1 Antennas 68-00006-00 : DWG, ASSY MOUNT UNIVERSAL FOR OMNI ANTENNA. Quantity: REF Assembly Drawing, Mechanical 55-00063-00 : BASE, WELDMENT, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI. Quantity: 1 Part 55-00079-00 : FLANGE C, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI. Quantity: 1 Part 55-00080-00 : GUSSET, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI . Quantity: 2 Part 55-00081-00 : PLATE, BASE, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI. Quantity: 1 Part 24-10000-00 : NUT, PEM, BLIND .250 1/4-20 BS-0420-2. Quantity: 8 Part Type 55-00088-00 : FLANGE, CLAMP, STANDARD MOUNT, GALVANIZED. Quantity: 2 Part 24-09000-00 : STUD, 7/16 X 14 LG ALL THREAD, GALVANIZED, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI. Quantity: 4 228 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Mechanical Hardware 24-09001-00 : WASHER, SQ, ALUMINUM, ANTENNA MOUNT. Quantity: 4 Mechanical Hardware 24-09002-00 : WASHER, SQ, GALVANIZED, ANTENNA MOUNT. Quantity: 4 Mechanical Hardware 24-09003-00 : FLAT WASHER 7/16 REG GALVANIZED. Quantity: 12 Mechanical Hardware 24-09005-00 : LOCK WASHER, 7/16, GALVANIZED. Quantity: 12 Mechanical Hardware 24-09004-00 : HEX NUT 7/16 GALVANIZED. Quantity: 12 Mechanical Hardware 24-00124-00 : BOLT, HEX 1/4-20 X 1.250 LG SSPA. Quantity: 8 Part Type 24-06250-14 : WASH, LOCK, SPLIT, CRES 1/4, Reg, .252X.487X.062. Quantity: 8 Part 24-06250-28 : WASH, FLAT, CRES, 1/4 T-B-REGULAR, .281 X .734 X .063. Quantity: 8 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 229 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 230 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide BAR PANEL GROUND ANTENNA OPTION 4 OPTION 3 OPTION 5 RF CABLES PROTECTOR LIGHTNING PANEL ANTENNA PSX-ME SURGE PANEL LOCATION NAVINI NETWORKS CABLE RUN / INTERNAL RUN CABLE RUN / CABLE LADDER ROD ANTENNA BRACKET BASE STATION LAYOUT WATER TOWER OPTION Appendix P: Sample Base Station Drawing OVERHEAD CABLE LADDER ETHERNET
/ TELCO ETHERNET
/ TELCO PANEL LOCATION CORE TO INSIDE PSX-ME SURGE CABLE LADDER SHELTER / HUT 24VDC
@ 60A CABLE ENTRY 24VDC
@ 60A INDOOR BTS GROUND BAR GROUND BAR INDOOR BTS PROTECTOR RF CABLES OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OF TOWER OPTION 6 CABINET ANTENNA CABINET NAVINI GROUND NAVINI PANEL GPS PSX BTS BAR GND BTS GND PSX Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 231 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. NOTE 1.CABLE BUNDLE CONSIST OF 9 RF CABLES AND 1 POWER/DATA CABLE 2.RF CABLE TYPE TO BE DETERMINED BASED ON RUN LENGTH AND DB LOSS/FT 3.CABLE HANGERS TO BE SPECIFIED/RECOMMENDED BY TOWER CREW 4.ANTENNA BRACKET TO BE SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER AS RECOMMENDED BY TOWER CREW 5.BTS REQUIRES 24VDC @ 60A. 6.PSX-ME SURGE PROTECTORS TO BE INSTALLED IN-LINE BETWEEN RF CABLE AND ANTENNA 7.PSX SURGE PROTECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON GROUND BAR CLOSE TO BTS CABINET/CHASSIS 8.ETHERNET/TELCO BACKHAUL TO BE PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER 9.ALL INSTALLED EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED 10.OPTION 1 IS FOR AN INDOOR BTS INSTALL, OPTION 2 IS FOR OUTDOOR BTS CUSTOMER SITE NAME LOCATION 1 PANEL LOCATION OPTION 5=DOME TOP 6=SIDE 2 ANTENNA BRACKET TYPE 3 PSX-ME SURGE PROTECTOR PCS 4 ANTENNA AZIMUTH 5 ANTENNA HEIGHT 6 ANTENNA DOWNTILT 7 TOWER JUMPER LENGTH 8 TOWER JUMPER CABLE TYPE 9 M AIN FEEDER TYPE 10 M AIN FEEDER LENGTH 11 GROUND BUSS BAR 12 13 CABLE HANGER TYPE WEATHERPROOFING KIT 14 GROUNDING CABLE LENGTH 15 GROUNDING KIT 16 HOISTING GRIP 17 GPS M OUNT 18 GPS CABLE LENGTH 19 GPS CABLE TYPE 20 LOCATION OPTION 1=SHELTER 2=INSIDE TOWER 21 CABLE RUN OPTION 3=EXTERNAL 4=INTERNAL 22 JUMPER CABLE LENGTH 23 JUMPER CABLE TYPE 24 PSX SURGE PROTECTOR 25 GPS SURGE PROTECTOR 26 ALT GROUND BUSS BAR 27 24VDC/60A POWER SUPPLY 28 INDOOR RACK/CABINET DEGREES FEET FEET PCS PCS FEET PCS PCS FEET FEET PCS PCS PCS 232 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix Q: Sample Statement of Work The following is an example of a Statement of Work. The Statement of Work outlines the general activities that must be conducted in order to complete the installation and commissioning tasks for a Ripwave Base Station. Example:
Statement of Work for Standard Installation Services The following statement of work will be used to outline the areas of responsibilities for the Navini Networks antenna (known as the RFS) and Base Station (known as the BTS) installations to be completed with Navini Networks Client (referred to as Client in this document). Client may choose to hire a contractor or tower crew to assist with its activities. Navini Networks has no formal contract relationship with the contractor, who will be managed by Client. The following work items are suggested content only - - final scope and terms to be negotiated directly with Client. Navini Networks support personnel will be on site for the entire installation and commissioning process, and will provide technical expertise, information, and recommendations with respect to site design and installation. It is recommended that contractor have a Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) in place with Client and Navini Networks prior to execution of work. Contractor shall not publicly disclose any information concerning this deployment or trial with any other parties, unless approved in writing in advance by Client and Navini Networks. Navini Networks 1. Provide Field Engineer to consult with Client and Contractor for planning efforts. Review Site design sketches and BOM prepared by others. 2. Review network architecture information (connection diagram and logical addresses) prior to start of installation. 3. Review Sweep results with Client and contractor. Sweep to be provided of RFS after shipment, of coax cables and RF path on tower, and of cables and RFS after installation, before power up. 4. Review AC and DC power system installation. Review DC power system test with Client and contractor. 5. Review backhaul circuit installation test results with Client. 6. Review GPS antenna and cable installations. 7. Review and Verify Cable and Antenna System Installation Work 8. Site walk with contractor and Client for Punchlist. 9. Load EMS software on Client supplied workstation, and verify connectivity to BTS. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 233 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 10. Provide BTS installation Chassis and Cards. 11. Apply power to BTS and perform all power up, BTS calibration verification checks, commissioning and initial testing of Navini Networks system. May use EMS on local laptop. 12. With assistance of Client, Perform Drive Test / Coverage Verification. 13. With assistance of Client, perform data rate testing at mutually specified locations 15 for Omni, 5 for each panel RFS. 14. With client, integrate BTS into backhaul network and verify operation. 15. Closeout / Customer Acceptance package, including inventory of hardware. 16. Navini Networks to provide own tools and test equipment. 17. Clean job site daily. Client / Contractor Work Items 1. Perform Site survey at each site. 2. Prepare Installation sketch and Bill of Materials (BOM) for each site. Note that these are not sealed construction drawings. 3. Client / Contractor Site Design and Bid Walk. 4. Material Procurement. 5. Acquire building permits. 6. Inside Network cabling from demark to BTS rack 7. AC power installation (provide dedicated 115 VAC 20 A circuit for each BTS, dual outlet receptacle). 8. Air conditioning work or other hut electrical work. 9. 24 VDC rectifier installation, cabling to BTS chassis, cabling to AC circuit breaker. Test 24 VDC system (note: do not apply power to BTS). 10. Mount 19 TELCO rack inside hut (base anchors, or overhead brackets or both) 11. Provide core drilling and furnish and install feed through panel for coax cables, unless already existing. Seal holes using similar materials to other existing feed-through at each site. 12. Install grounding inside hut for rack and 24 VDC system. Install ground bus bar inside hut entry per drawings. Install ground bus bars on antenna structure and ground coax cables per sketch. 13. Install and apply coax cables and connectors. This includes main coax runs on tower, plus coax jumpers at antenna and at hut, as specified by drawings. Recommend and Install all cable hangers and supports, and grounding, per standard practice in use at tower location. Install surge protectors per design sketches and BOM. 14. Sweep test coax cables at designated sweep frequencies. 15. Install power and data cable from antenna to BTS. 16. Weather seal all outside connections. 17. Recommend, furnish and install mounting structure (arm assembly) to stand-off Navini RFS from tower. Standoff assembly to include pipe mount for antenna mount. Install Navini RFS on arm on tower. Connect to coax cables and provide sweep of cable / RFS assembly. Provide photographic documentation of tower top installation work. 18. Provide equipment and cable labeling as required. 19. Install (2) GPS antennas on ice bridge (or other agreed upon location). Furnish and 234 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide install any required brackets or pipe mounts. Install GPS coax cables and connectors from GPS antenna to BTS. 20. Site walk at completion with Client and Navini, create Punchlist; clear applicable punchlist items. required. 21. Arrange disposal of trash 22. Provide RF coverage analysis plots before start of installation. Provide model tuning, if 23. Provide architecture document before start of installation, including connection diagram and logical network element assignments (IP addresses, PVCs, etc.). 24. Set Up and Verify all network equipment and backhaul circuits. 25. Set Up and Verify Operation and connectivity of EMS computer. 26. Provide one resource to assist with drive testing and location data rate testing. 27. Provide all end user / CPE provisioning in EMS after initial testing. 28. Provide all end user interface and troubleshooting. 29. Monitor EMS / alarms. Forward trouble issues to Navini call center. 30. Contractor and Client to provide own tools, computers, and test equipment. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 235 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 236 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix R: Sample Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM) The following is an example of a Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM). The RAM is a tool for capturing who will do what to get systems deployed and turned up. It provides an easy-to-
read and follow tabular format. Each of the activities in the list must be addressed in order to complete the installation and commissioning tasks for a Ripwave Base Station. 1 = Primary Responsibility 2 = Secondary Responsibility S = Supply I = Install Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes MARKET PLANNING and RF ENGINEERING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Develop coverage objectives Provide Hardware Specifications Provide Link Budget Prepare Preliminary Coverage Plots Interference Analysis / Noise Floor Link Specific Channel Assignments Review / Approve RF Design SCT Filing fees SCT licensing / clearing Contract RF consulting engineering Obtain SCT Test Permit NETWORK ENGINEERING & BACKHAUL 1 Network Requirements Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 237 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Network Architecture Provisioning Guidelines IP / data Address Assignment / management Review / Approve Network Design Network Architecture backhaul ATM layer Provisioning / management Order Circuits Order equipment for backhaul / interface 10 Backhaul Network Test SITE ACQUISITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Identify BTS candidates in search ring Identify CPE Candidates per ring Identification of Zoning requirements Select BTS sites Negotiate and close lease Pay lease costs Obtain any building permits if required Arrange Site Access SITE DESIGN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Site Survey BTS sites Prepare Site Design Sketches / Layout Prepare BOM Review Design / Approve A&E Selection and management Prepare / approve A&E drawings 238 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 7 8 9 10 11 Tower Structural Analysis Contractor Qualifications and Selection Contractor walk through Obtain / Review bids / Award contract Obtain Building permits or other approvals LOGISTICS / SHIPPING / DELIVERY 1 2 3 4 Create Logistics Plan Ship Navini supplied Equipment to designated warehouse Deliver Equipment to Specific Sites Disposal of Shipping materials CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Antenna Mounts / brackets Antennas (Navini RFS) Coax Cable / Connectors Power / Signal Cable / Connectors (BTS to RFS) Ground Kits Surge protectors/Ground Buss Bars GPS 4-Way Splitters for multiple BTS installed at one site. BTS Equipment Racks / Enclosures 2 1 2 S S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S, I I S, I I S, I S, I S, I S, I Navini will assist and supervise installation from the ground. 1 per BTS. Navini to supply surge protector for the power and data cable. Client to supply surge protectors for coaxial feedlines. 2 4-Way Splitters needed for 3-sector installation. Need to confirm indoor installation. Enclosure not required indoors. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 239 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 DC Power System 24VDC @ 60 Amps for each BTS Batteries / UPS Intra rack cabling Electrical Circuits Electrical wiring from panel to rack Electrical (conduit, distribution panels, etc.) Environmental Equipment Miscellaneous Hardware BTS cages / cards Network Router Network Ethernet Switch with ATM interface EMS Server / workstation EMS client workstation (for techs) S, I EMS client workstation (for Navini) S, I Server for DHCP and network applications CPE User PC with Ethernet and/or USB Card Provide Construction Supervisor 27 Provide Installation Resources CONSTRUCTION 1 Site Preparation/Infrastructure 240 S 2 2 2 S, I S, I S, I S, I S, I S, I S, I S S, I S, I S, I S, I S, I S 1 1 1 Navini will supervise installation of Navini equipment. Client contractors. Navini will install the BTS in the client installed rack/cabinet. Navini will provide technical guidance for installation of the RFS. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Pull Cables Install Connectors and Grounding Install Surge Protectors Test / Sweep Coax Install mounts / brackets Install Racks Electrical power to Rack Backhaul to rack Environmental (if required) Quality Assurance Inspections / Punch List Close all Punch List Items Provide POTS line for technician use EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING & INTEGRATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Inspect / Test Cabling / Connections Install Rack Mount Power System / Card Cages Test DC System Plug cards in BTS Load EMS / Configure Boot BTS Provision EMS / BTS / CPE Test Operation Integrate Backhaul Verify Operation Router: Configure / test Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 241 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 12 13 14 DHCP Server: configure / test EMS Client: Configure / Test Configure monitoring for routers TESTING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Determine Network Test Criteria Determine RF Test Criteria Generate Acceptance Test Plan (ATP) Review Test Plan Supply Test Equipment HP/Agilent E4402B Spectrum Analyzer with Floppy Storage Option, HP/Agilent 8648C RF Signal Generator, Tektronix TDS 3012B Scope Execute Trial Test Plan and capture data Provide Vehicle and Driver for System Drive Testing Analyze test data and write report Review Report, Trial test results END USER ENGAGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Prepare End User profile Develop User Procedures Recruit and Sign Up Users Distribute CPE kits Develop User Surveys Survey Users, collect data Issue reports SUPPORT & SERVICES 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Based on trial agreement. Based on trial agreement. Some tests will utilize built in test capability. 242 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 System Training for Service Provider Monitor Network End User Contact (answer phones) Fault Determination and Isolation Performance Reporting Field Repairs / Replacements (if needed) Shipping for Repairs / Replacements Spares Install Hardware Upgrades (if needed) 10 Install Software Upgrades (if needed) 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 Client to provide Level 1 support. Spares count TBD. Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 243 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 244 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide LIST OF EXHIBITS EXHIBIT 1: BOOT COMMANDS.......................................................................................................78 EXHIBIT 2: ETHERNET CONFIGURATION........................................................................................79 EXHIBIT 3: ATM/T1 CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................82 EXHIBIT 4: ADDITIONAL ATM PARAMETERS ...............................................................................82 EXHIBIT 5: IMA CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................84 EXHIBIT 6: IMA CLOCK MODE.....................................................................................................86 EXHIBIT 7: STANDARD ETHERNET BOOT SEQUENCE - EXAMPLE ..................................................86 EXHIBIT 8: STANDARD ATM BOOT SEQUENCE - EXAMPLE..........................................................88 EXHIBIT 9: ON-BOARD FILE SYSTEMS...........................................................................................90 EXHIBIT 10: TCP/IP STACK..........................................................................................................90 EXHIBIT 11: BTS REBOOT - EXAMPLE..........................................................................................94 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 245 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 246 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide LIST OF FIGURES FIGURE 1: BASE STATION INSTALLATION WITH PANEL ANTENNA................................................17 FIGURE 2: I&C PROCESS FLOWCHART..........................................................................................20 FIGURE 3: BTS CHASSIS ...............................................................................................................29 FIGURE 4: RFS..............................................................................................................................30 FIGURE 5: GPS ANTENNAS ............................................................................................................31 FIGURE 6: INDOOR BTS ................................................................................................................32 FIGURE 7: DATA/POWER CABLE SURGE PROTECTOR....................................................................42 FIGURE 8: ANTENNA & CAL CABLE SURGE PROTECTOR ..............................................................43 FIGURE 9: GPS CABLE SURGE PROTECTOR ..................................................................................43 FIGURE 10: SURGE PROTECTORS IN BUSS BAR .............................................................................43 FIGURE 11 : BUSS BARS................................................................................................................44 FIGURE 12: GPS DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER..................................................................................46 FIGURE 13: DEPICTION OF GPS DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER............................................................47 FIGURE 14: BUSS BAR CONNECTIONS ...........................................................................................48 FIGURE 15 : OMNI CABLE ROUTING..............................................................................................49 FIGURE 16: PANEL CABLE ROUTING .............................................................................................49 FIGURE 17: BTS MOUNTING RACK...............................................................................................50 FIGURE 18: BTS CHASSIS .............................................................................................................51 FIGURE 19: SPLIT VS. COMBO CHASSIS POWER............................................................................52 FIGURE 20: SPLIT CHASSIS POWER CONNECTIONS........................................................................53 FIGURE 21: MOTOROLA TIMING 2000 GPS ..................................................................................55 FIGURE 22: VIC 100 GPS.............................................................................................................55 FIGURE 23: MOTOROLA GPS ANTENNA MOUNTING BRACKETS...................................................56 FIGURE 24: MOTOROLA GPS ANTENNA MOUNTED TO A POLE.....................................................56 FIGURE 25: VIC 100 PIPE CLAMP MOUNT....................................................................................57 FIGURE 26: VIC 100 GPS ANTENNA............................................................................................57 FIGURE 27: ASSEMBLED VIC 100 ANTENNA & MOUNT...............................................................57 FIGURE 28: RFS MOUNTING BRACKET.........................................................................................58 FIGURE 29: OMNI ANTENNA ELEMENTS .......................................................................................59 FIGURE 30: DECLINATION ANGLE.................................................................................................60 FIGURE 31: SURGE PROTECTORS....................................................................................................61 FIGURE 32: RFS CONNECTORS .....................................................................................................62 FIGURE 33: COMPLETED CABLE INSTALLATION............................................................................63 FIGURE 34: RFS GROUNDING .......................................................................................................64 FIGURE 35: WEATHERIZED CABLES ..............................................................................................64 FIGURE 36: COMBO CHASSIS REAR VIEW .....................................................................................65 FIGURE 37: SPLIT CHASSIS RF/PA SHELF REAR VIEW .................................................................66 FIGURE 38: SPLIT CHASSIS DIGITAL SHELF REAR VIEW ...............................................................66 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 247 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. FIGURE 39: OMNI ANTENNA MOUNT .............................................................................................67 FIGURE 40: SECURED OMNI ANTENNA MOUNT .............................................................................67 FIGURE 41: OMNI GROUND STUD..................................................................................................68 FIGURE 42: WEATHERIZED CONNECTORS .....................................................................................68 FIGURE 43: DIGITAL SHELF...........................................................................................................69 FIGURE 44: PORTS ON CC CARD...................................................................................................72 FIGURE 45: COM1 PROPERTIES....................................................................................................74 FIGURE 46: BTS POWER ON SWITCHES ........................................................................................77 FIGURE 47: SELECT BTS...............................................................................................................96 FIGURE 48: CALIBRATE BTS.........................................................................................................97 FIGURE 49: WARNING WINDOW ...................................................................................................97 FIGURE 50: FULL CALIBRATION WINDOW.....................................................................................98 FIGURE 51: SHOW CONFIGURATION/ANTENNA TABLE .................................................................98 FIGURE 52: CONFIG LAYER 1 DATA WINDOW ..............................................................................99 FIGURE 53: REFERENCE CABLE MEASUREMENT .........................................................................101 FIGURE 54: REFERENCE & TEST CABLE MEASUREMENTS ..........................................................101 FIGURE 55: COUPLER MEASUREMENT ........................................................................................102 FIGURE 56: TEST EQUIPMENT FOR RECEIVE VERIFICATION ........................................................105 FIGURE 57: OSCILLOSCOPE RECEIVE TIME .................................................................................106 FIGURE 58: TEST EQUIPMENT FOR TRANSMITTER VERIFICATION ...............................................109 FIGURE 59: SYNC SIGNAL ...........................................................................................................110 FIGURE 60: WIRED CPE SETUP...................................................................................................111 FIGURE C1: PIN LAYOUT.............................................................................................................133 FIGURE C2: TEST SETUP .............................................................................................................137 FIGURE C3: SWEEP TEST MARKER MEASUREMENT EXAMPLE....................................................138 FIGURE C4: INSERTION LOSS (CABLES ON GROUND) MARKER MEASUREMENT EXAMPLE.........139 FIGURE C5: INSERTION LOSS (CABLES ON TOWER) MARKER MEASUREMENT EXAMPLE ...........141 FIGURE C6: RFS ONLY TESTING SETUP .....................................................................................142 FIGURE C7: RFS ONLY TX VERIFICATION..................................................................................143 FIGURE C8: RFS ONLY TX MARKER MEASUREMENT EXAMPLE ................................................143 FIGURE C9: RFS ONLY RX VERIFICATION..................................................................................144 FIGURE C10: RFS ONLY RX MARKER MEASUREMENT EXAMPLE ..............................................145 FIGURE C11: RFS & CABLES TX MARKER MEASUREMENT EXAMPLE.......................................146 FIGURE C12: RFS & CABLES RX MARKER MEASUREMENT EXAMPLE.......................................147 FIGURE G1: RF COVERAGE ANALYSIS EXAMPLE .......................................................................183 FIGURE G2: DRIVE STUDY ROUTE EXAMPLE..............................................................................184 FIGURE G3: PATCH ANTENNAS...................................................................................................185 FIGURE H1: EXAMPLE OF A 3-SECTOR SITE.................................................................................189 FIGURE H2: EXAMPLE OF 120 OF AN OMNI SITE .......................................................................190 FIGURE L1: PIN ORIENTATION ....................................................................................................215 FIGURE N1: SYSTEM DIAGRAMS.................................................................................................219 FIGURE N2: BBU RACK..............................................................................................................225 248 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide LIST OF TABLES TABLE 1: RIPWAVE STANDARD DOCUMENTATION CD .................................................................18 TABLE 2: VAR I&C DOCUMENTATION CD..................................................................................18 TABLE 3: OPERATING FREQUENCIES.............................................................................................34 TABLE 4: COMBO CHASSIS SYSTEM (ISM SYSTEMS)....................................................................34 TABLE 5: SPLIT CHASSIS SYSTEM (MMDS & WCS SYSTEMS) ....................................................35 TABLE 6: MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................................36 TABLE 7: ACTIVE & PASSIVE RFS LOSS / OPERATING PARAMETERS...........................................45 TABLE 8: CABLE ATTENUATION IN DB PER 100 FEET...................................................................45 TABLE 9: DIGITAL CARD NAMES ..................................................................................................70 TABLE C1: PINOUT DETAILS.......................................................................................................134 TABLE C2: RESISTANCE TO GROUND..........................................................................................135 TABLE C3: RESISTANCE OF TWO PAIRS ......................................................................................135 TABLE C4: ACTIVE & PASSIVE RFS LOSS / OPERATING PARAMETERS ......................................136 TABLE C5: SWEEP FREQUENCIES................................................................................................137 TABLE H1: LOCATION (FTP) TEST FORM...................................................................................194 TABLE J1: 2.6 GHZ BTS.............................................................................................................198 TABLE J2: BTS TO RFS INTERFACE............................................................................................198 TABLE L1: PIN NAMES................................................................................................................216 TABLE L2: BBU SIGNAL NAMES................................................................................................216 TABLE N1: INPUT SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................220 TABLE N2: OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................................220 TABLE N3: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................221 TABLE N4: PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................222 TABLE N5: ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................222 TABLE N6: REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................223 TABLE N7: RELIABILITY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................223 Part #40-00047-00 Rev D v1.0 February 28, 2003 249
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2004-01-27 | 2402 ~ 2481 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2004-01-27
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Cisco Systems, Inc
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0018679845
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
125 W Tasman
|
||||
| 1 |
San Jose, California 95134
|
|||||
| 1 |
United States
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
PL6
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
BTS-TP1
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
G****** T******
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Manager , EMC Standards and Operations
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
408-5********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
| 1 |
g******@cisco.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Nemko-Dallas
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
T**** T********
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
802 North Kealy
|
||||
| 1 |
Lewisville, Texas 75057
|
|||||
| 1 |
United States
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
972-4******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
972-4********
|
||||
| 1 |
t******@nemkona.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Nemko-Dallas
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
T**** T****
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
802 N. Kealy
|
||||
| 1 |
Lewisville, Texas 75057
|
|||||
| 1 |
United States
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
972-4******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
972-4********
|
||||
| 1 |
t******@nemkona.com
|
|||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Ripwave TTA Base Station | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | This device must be professionally installed. Output power is conducted at each antenna. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 1.5 meters from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Nemko Dallas, Inc.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M****** C******
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
972-4********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
972-4********
|
||||
| 1 |
@******@.
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2402.00000000 | 2481.00000000 | 0.4190000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC